Method for controlling information apparatus, computer-readable recording medium, and method for providing information

ABSTRACT

A control method causes a computer of an information apparatus to: display on a display a display screen representing a floor plan including one or more rooms; using at least one memory that associates first information indicating a type of each of one or more device icons representing one or more target devices with second information indicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms, display each of the one or more device icons in a room that corresponds to each of the one or more device icons in accordance with the type of each of the one or more device icons; and when it is determined that one device icon of the one or more device icons is a second type, the one device icon is displayed in a same room as a room in which the device icon of a first type is displayed.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. patent application Ser. No.15/708,541, filed on Sep. 19, 2017, which is a continuation of U.S.patent application Ser. No. 14/580,819, filed on Dec. 23, 2014, which isa continuation of International Patent Application No.PCT/JP2013/003964, filed on Jun. 25, 2013, which claims the benefit ofU.S. Provisional Patent Application Nos. 61/806,580, filed on Mar. 29,2013, 61/806,604, filed on Mar. 29, 2013, 61/806,608, filed on Mar. 29,2013, 61/806,528, filed on Mar. 29, 2013, and 61/806,587, filed on Mar.29, 2013, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference hereinin their entireties.

TECHNICAL FIELD

The present disclosure relates to a method for controlling informationapparatus, a computer-readable recording medium, and a method forproviding information.

BACKGROUND ART

Patent Literature 1 discloses a technique for displaying a device iconon a display screen displaying a floor plan and displaying an operationscreen of a target device when the device icon is selected. The targetdevice is remotely operated using the operation screen. According toPatent Literature 1, an input screen is displayed when connection of anew target device is detected, whereby a user inputs a name of thetarget device, a name of a room where the target device is installed,and a name of a floor on which the target device is installed to theinput screen (FIG. 8A).

Patent Literature 2 discloses a technique for displaying a device iconon a display screen displaying a floor plan. According to PatentLiterature 2, when connection of a new target device is detected, bymoving a device icon corresponding to the new target device to aninstallation position of the target device on the floor plan, the targetdevice and position information of the target device on the floor planare managed in association with each other.

However, Patent Literature 1 and Patent Literature 2 require furtherimprovements.

Patent Literature 1 U.S. Pat. No. 7,730,223

Patent Literature 2 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No.2005-198252

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

In one general aspect, the techniques disclosed here feature a methodfor controlling information apparatus having a display and beingconnected to a network, over which one or more target devices arecontrolled.

-   -   the method causing a computer of the information apparatus to:    -   display on the display a display screen representing a floor        plan including one or more rooms;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing the one or more        target devices and the second information indicating an        attribute of each of the one or more rooms, display each of the        one or more device icons in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or        more device icons in accordance with the type of each of the one        or more device icons;    -   when selection of any of the one or more device icons is sensed        in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in the        floor plan, display a control screen for at least any of        operation and state confirmation of a target device        corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screen        representing the floor plan; and    -   output to the network a control command for at least any of the        operation and the state confirmation of the target device        corresponding to the selected device icon, based on an operation        on the control screen, wherein    -   the one or more device icons include a device icon of a first        type and a device icon of a second type that is in a        relationship of being displayed in a region on the display        screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which the        device icon of the first type is displayed, and    -   when it is determined that one device icon among the one or more        device icons is the device icon of the second type, the one        device icon is displayed in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a same room as a room in which the device icon        of the first type is displayed.

According to the aspect described above, it is possible to embody afurther improvement.

These general and specific aspects may be implemented using a system, amethod, and a computer program, and any combination of systems, methods,and computer programs.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a home controlsystem to which a home controller according to the present disclosure isapplied.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing main devices to be controlled by the homecontroller according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the homecontroller, a device, and a server according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the form ofimplementation of the home controller according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen of thehome controller according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a floor plan according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the floor plan includingarrangement information for device icons as texts according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of the floor plan includingarrangement information for device icons as images according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the floor plan includingarrangement information for device icons as images according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of transition between a firstfloor display state and a second floor display state of the basic screenof the home controller according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the configuration of the display state of adevice control screen of the home controller according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a device icon arrangement example of thedisplay state of the device control screen of the home controlleraccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of the display state of adevice control screen of the home controller according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a device icon arrangement example of thedisplay state of the device control screen of the home controlleraccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a device icon arrangement example of thedisplay state of the device control screen of the home controlleraccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a device icon arrangement example of thedisplay state of the device control screen of the home controlleraccording to the present disclosure.

FIGS. 17A and 17B are diagrams showing configuration examples of thedisplay state of the device control screen of the home controlleraccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the basicscreen of the home controller and the display state of the devicecontrol screen according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the secondfloor display state of the basic screen of the home controller and thedisplay state of the device control screen for the second flooraccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of transition from the displaystate of the device control screen of a certain device to the displaystate of the device control screen of another device according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of transition between thedisplay state and the hidden state of the device control screen of thehome controller according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an animation for transitionfrom the basic screen of the home controller to the display state of thedevice control screen according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of an animation for transitionfrom the basic screen of the home controller to the display state of thedevice control screen according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device icon listdisplay screen of the home controller according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the basicscreen of the home controller and the device icon list display screenaccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the deviceicon list display screen of the home controller and the display state ofthe device control screen according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an example of transition between the basicscreen of the home controller and the display state of the devicecontrol screen according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing how the home controller successivelytransitions among the display states of the device control screens fordifferent devices according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of display on the basic screenof devices that cannot be detected on a network according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the configuration of home informationaccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the configuration of vertex informationaccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the configuration of room informationaccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence betweenthe vertex information and the floor plan for the first floor accordingto the present disclosure.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list managedby the server according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list managedby the home controller according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 36 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to acquire the home information from the server according tothe present disclosure.

FIG. 37 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to detect a device on a network when the home controller isconnected to the network according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 38 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to detect a device on a network when the device is connectedto the network according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 39A is a flowchart showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to control a device according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 39B is a flowchart showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to control a device according to the present disclosure.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to generate a control command for a device in accordance withthe content of a contact by a contacting object according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to transmit a control command according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 42 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to directly control a device according to the presentdisclosure.

FIG. 43 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to control a device by way of the server according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 44 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to acquire the state of a device from the server according tothe present disclosure.

FIG. 45 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to directly control devices in the case where the homecontroller controls a plurality of devices with one operation accordingto the present disclosure.

FIG. 46 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to control devices by way of the server in the case where thehome controller controls a plurality of devices with one operationaccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 47 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller to control devices by way of the server in the case where thehome controller controls a plurality of devices with one operationaccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 48 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for a casewhere a device icon is moved in the home controller according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 49 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for updatingthe device lists of the home controller and the server according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 50 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for updatingthe device lists of the home controller and the server according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 51 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for updatingthe device lists of the home controller and the server according to thepresent disclosure.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a floor plan in another pattern accordingto the present disclosure.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen thatadopts the floor plan shown in FIG. 52.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the display state of a device controlscreen for a case where the floor plan shown in FIG. 52 is adopted.

FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating transition between the display stateof the basic screen and the display state of the device control screen.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the configuration of a floor plan in whichthe size of each room is varied in accordance with the actual room sizein the floor plan shown in FIG. 52.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen thatadopts the floor plan shown in FIG. 56.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the display state of a device controlscreen for a case where the floor plan shown in FIG. 56 is adopted asthe floor plan.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a floor plan in still another patternaccording to the present disclosure.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen thatadopts the floor plan shown in FIG. 59.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the display state of a device controlscreen for a case where the floor plan shown in FIG. 59 is adopted.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a floor plan displayed on a display in thecase where a user performs a pinch-out operation on a room in the floorplan shown in FIG. 59.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the display state of a device controlscreen in the floor plan displayed as enlarged shown in FIG. 62.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state ofthe basic screen to the display state of the device control screen.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen whichadopts the floor plan shown in FIG. 59 and in which device icons are notdisplayed.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state ofthe basic screen to the display state of the device control screen for acase where the basic screen in which device icons are not displayed isadopted.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the configuration of the home informationfor a case where the floor plan shown in FIG. 52 is adopted.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the configuration of room information shownin FIG. 67.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence betweenthe display position in the room information shown in FIG. 67 and thefloor plan.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list managedby the server for a case where the floor plan shown in FIG. 52 isadopted.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list managedby the home controller for a case where the floor plan shown in FIG. 52is adopted.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a basic screen that isdisplayed on a display of a home controller.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of adevice control screen of a home controller.

FIG. 74 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying process fordisplaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

FIG. 75A is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a refrigerator is newly registered,FIG. 75B is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a television set is newly registered,and FIG. 75C is a diagram showing an example of a device newregistration request that is transmitted when a humidifier is newlyregistered.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by a server.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table thatassociates a device type and a room type with each other.

FIG. 78A is a diagram showing an example of a first reference table thatassociates a device ID and a device type name with each other, FIG. 78Bis a diagram showing an example of a second reference table thatassociates a room ID and a room type name with each other, and FIG. 78Cis a diagram showing an example of a third reference table thatassociates a device ID and a room ID with each other.

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of room information.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a device list that is managedby a server.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of vertex information.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between eachvertex registered in vertex information and a floor plan.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a refrigerator.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a television set.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a humidifier.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart for explaining another example of an initialarrangement deciding process by a server.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a television set.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a humidifier.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a floor plan with a different pattern.

FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a newly registered device on the floor plan with a differentpattern.

FIG. 91 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by a home controller.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart for explaining another example of an initialarrangement deciding process by a home controller.

FIG. 94 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a serverfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered when the device transmits a device newregistration request to a home controller.

FIG. 95 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the devicetransmits a device new registration request to a server.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a basic screen that isdisplayed on a display of a home controller.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of adevice control screen of a home controller.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that isdisplayed on a display of a home controller before a device is newlyregistered.

FIG. 99 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying process fordisplaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a television set is to be newlyregistered.

FIG. 101 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by a server.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table thatassociates a device type and a room type with each other.

FIG. 103A is a diagram showing an example of a first reference tablethat associates a device ID and a device type name with each other. FIG.103B is a diagram showing an example of a second reference table thatassociates a room ID and a room type name with each other, and FIG. 103Cis a diagram showing an example of a third reference table thatassociates a device ID and a room ID with each other.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table thatassociates a device performance and a room size with each other.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of vertex information.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of room information.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between eachvertex registered in vertex information and a floor plan.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a large-sizedtelevision set.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when a device to be newly registered is a small-sized televisionset.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a small-sizedtelevision set.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when a device to be newly registered is an air conditioner.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table thatassociates a device performance and a room size with each other when adevice type is an air conditioner.

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is an air conditioner.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when devices to be newly registered are two illuminationdevices.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table thatassociates a device performance and a room size with each other when adevice type is an illumination device.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when devices to be newly registered are two illuminationdevices.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess for deciding arrangement positions of a plurality of deviceicons corresponding to a plurality of devices of a same type.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when devices to be newly registered are two illuminationdevices.

FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when devices to be newly registered are two illuminationdevices.

FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a floor plan with a different pattern.

FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a newly registered device on the floor plan with a differentpattern.

FIG. 122 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by a home controller.

FIG. 124 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a serverfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered when the device transmits a device newregistration request to a home controller.

FIG. 125 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the devicetransmits a device new registration request to a server.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a basic screen that isdisplayed on a display of a home controller.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a configuration of a display state of adevice control screen of a home controller.

FIG. 128 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying processfor displaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a microwave oven is to be newlyregistered.

FIG. 130 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by a server.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table thatassociates a device type and a room type with each other.

FIG. 132A is a diagram showing an example of a first reference tablethat associates a device ID and a device type name with each other, FIG.132B is a diagram showing an example of a second reference table thatassociates a room ID and a room type name with each other, and FIG. 132Cis a diagram showing an example of a third reference table thatassociates a device ID and a room ID with each other.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of room information.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of vertex information.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between eachvertex registered in vertex information and a floor plan.

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a device type referencetable that is managed by a server.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of a device list that ismanaged by a server.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a use frequency managementtable that is managed by a server.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a microwave oven.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when a device to be newly registered is a content reproducingmachine.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a content reproducingmachine.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a floor plan with a different pattern.

FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a newly registered device on the floor plan with a differentpattern.

FIG. 144 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by a home controller.

FIG. 146 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a serverfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered when the device transmits a device newregistration request to a home controller.

FIG. 147 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the devicetransmits a device new registration request to a server.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a first floor plan.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a second floor plan.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a display screen corresponding to a firstresidence that is displayed on a display of a home controller.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a display screen corresponding to a secondresidence that is displayed on a display of a home controller.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a display screen corresponding to a thirdresidence that is displayed on a display of a home controller.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that isdisplayed on a display of a home controller before a device is newlyregistered.

FIG. 154 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying processfor displaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when an air conditioner is to be newlyregistered.

FIG. 156 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by a server.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of a layout type referencetable that is managed by a server.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of a device list that ismanaged by a server.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of a layout management tablerepresenting a correspondence relationship between a device type and aroom for each floor plan.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is an air conditioner.

FIG. 161 is a flow chart for explaining another example of an initialarrangement deciding process by a server.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of a layout management tablerepresenting a correspondence relationship between a device type and aroom for each floor plan.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is an air conditioner.

FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a floor plan with a different pattern.

FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a newly registered device on the floor plan with a differentpattern.

FIG. 166 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

FIG. 167 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a serverfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered when the device transmits a device newregistration request to a home controller.

FIG. 168 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by a homecontroller for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the devicetransmits a device new registration request to a server.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

(Story Before Inventing Aspect According to Present Disclosure)

First, the point of view of an aspect according to the presentdisclosure will be described.

In Patent Literature 1, an input screen is displayed and a user is askedto input a name of a target device, a name of a room where the targetdevice is installed, and a name of a floor on which the target device isinstalled to the input screen. Accordingly, operations becomecomplicated.

In Patent Literature 2, although a user is not asked to input a name ofa target device, a name of a room where the target device is installed,and a name of a floor on which the target device is installed as in thecase of Patent Literature 1, the user is required to perform anoperation involving moving a device icon corresponding to a new targetdevice to an installation position of the target device on the floorplan. In this manner, in Patent Literature 2, since an operation by theuser is required, operations become complicated. For example, since theuser is required to perform an unfamiliar operation, when a device iconcorresponding to a target device is moved to a room adjacent to adesired room by mistake, the target device ends up being registered inassociation with erroneous position information.

Based on the consideration described above, the present inventors havearrived at the invention according to the aspects described below.

An aspect of the present disclosure provides

-   -   a method for controlling information apparatus having a display        and being connected to a network, over which one or more target        devices are controlled,    -   the method causing a computer of the information apparatus to:    -   display on the display a display screen representing a floor        plan including one or more rooms;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing the one or more        target devices and the second information indicating an        attribute of each of the one or more rooms, display each of the        one or more device icons in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or        more device icons in accordance with the type of each of the one        or more device icons;    -   when selection of any of the one or more device icons is sensed        in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in the        floor plan, display a control screen for at least any of        operation and state confirmation of a target device        corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screen        representing the floor plan; and    -   output to the network a control command for at least any of the        operation and the state confirmation of the target device        corresponding to the selected device icon, based on an operation        on the control screen, wherein    -   the one or more device icons include a device icon of a first        type and a device icon of a second type that is in a        relationship of being displayed in a region on the display        screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which the        device icon of the first type is displayed, and    -   when it is determined that one device icon among the one or more        device icons is the device icon of the second type, the one        device icon is displayed in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a same room as a room in which the device icon        of the first type is displayed.

According to the aspect described above, the one or more device iconsinclude a device icon of a first type and a device icon of a second typethat is in a relationship of being displayed in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to a same room as a room in which the device iconof the first type is displayed. In addition, when it is determined thatone device icon among the one or more device icons is the device icon ofthe second type, the one device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first type is displayed.

Accordingly, for example, when the device icon of the first type is adevice icon representing a television set and the device icon of thesecond type is a device icon representing a content reproducing machinesuch as a DVD player, the device icon representing the contentreproducing machine is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as a room in which the device iconrepresenting the television set is displayed.

As described above, a display position of the device icon of the secondtype (for example, a device icon representing a content reproducingmachine) is determined by focusing on the fact that the device icon ofthe second type is in a relationship of being displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first type (for example, a device icon representing atelevision set) is displayed.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

(The Present Disclosure)

The present disclosure will be described below with reference to thedrawings. In the drawings, the same symbols are used for the sameconstituent elements.

In the present disclosure, a home controller which can singly controlone or more devices will be described.

(Overall Configuration)

FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a home controlsystem to which a home controller according to the present disclosure isapplied. As shown in FIG. 1, the home control system includes a homecontroller 100, a device 200 (an example of a target device), and aserver 300.

The home controller 100 and one or more devices 200 (for example, adevice A 200 and a device B 200) are disposed in a house. The server 300is disposed in a cloud center. The home controller 100, the device 200,and the server 300 communicate with each other via a wired or wirelessnetwork. For example, the device 200 and the home controller 100 arecommunicably connected to each other via a wireless or wired in-homenetwork, and the home controller 100, the device 200, and the server 300are communicably connected to each other via an external network such asthe Internet.

The home controller 100 is not necessarily disposed in the house, andmay be disposed outside the house. In this case, a user controls the oneor more devices 200 from a location away from the home.

A portable information terminal such as a smartphone or a tabletterminal may be adopted as the home controller 100. It should be noted,however, that the smartphone and the tablet terminal are merelyexemplary, and a portable information terminal of a button type such asa cellular phone may be adopted as the home controller 100.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the main devices 200 to be controlled by thehome controller 100. The home controller 100 controls the devices 200such as an air conditioner 201, illumination devices 202 and 203, a bath204, a refrigerator 205, a washing machine 206, a toilet 207, and acurtain 208. The devices 200 to be controlled by the home controller 100may include a plurality of devices 200 of the same type such as theillumination devices 202 and 203.

The devices 200 such as the air conditioner 201 shown in FIG. 2 aremerely exemplary, and a television set, a Blu-ray recorder, an audiodevice, and so forth may be adopted as the devices 200. That is, anyelectrical device that functions to communicate with the home controller100 may be adopted as the device 200. In FIG. 2, electrical devices foruse in ordinary households are shown as the devices 200. However, thepresent disclosure is not limited thereto, and office devices for use inoffices or the like may be adopted as the devices 200. Examples of theoffice devices include a printer, a personal computer, a scanner, and acopy machine.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the homecontroller 100, the device 200, and the server 300. As shown in FIG. 3,the home controller 100 includes a display 101, a touch panel controlsection 102, a display control section 103, a storage section 104, adevice management section 105, a device control section 106, and acommunication control section 107.

The display 101 is formed from a touch panel display, for example, anddisplays a user interface that allows the user to operate the homecontroller 100. The user can input various operations to the homecontroller 100 by contacting the display 101.

The touch panel control section 102 recognizes an operation performed onthe display 101 by the user, interprets the content of the operation,and notifies the other constituent elements of the content of theoperation. For example, if an object is displayed at a position on thedisplay 101 tapped on by the user, the touch panel control section 102determines that the object is selected by the user. A variety of GUIparts that receive a user operation such as buttons are adopted as theobject.

The display control section 103 generates a GUI (Graphical UserInterface) of the home controller 100, and causes the display 101 todisplay the GUI. The storage section 104 stores information that isnecessary for operation of the home controller 100 such as a device listmanaged by the device management section 105.

The device management section 105 manages the control target devices 200using the device list stored in the storage section 104. In addition,the device management section 105 detects a device 200 when the device200 is connected to the in-home network. Further, the device managementsection 105 acquires home information 2700 to be discussed later fromthe server 300, stores the acquired home information 2700 in the storagesection 104, and manages the home information 2700. The device controlsection 106 issues a control command for the devices 200. Thecommunication control section 107 controls communication between thehome controller 100 and the devices 200 and communication between thehome controller 100 and the server 300. In addition, the communicationcontrol section 107 transmits a variety of data to the devices 200 orthe server 300 upon receiving a request to transmit such data from otherblocks, and receives data transmitted from the devices 200 or the server300 to deliver the data to the relevant block.

The display 101 may be a normal display rather than a touch paneldisplay. In this case, the user may use an external input device such asa mouse (not shown) to input an instruction to select an object bymoving a pointer displayed on the display 101 and clicking on a desiredobject. That is, in the present disclosure, a series of operationsperformed by the user by contacting the display 101 may be replaced withoperations of moving a pointer and clicking using an external inputdevice such as a mouse.

As shown in FIG. 3, the device 200 includes a control execution section201, a state management section 202, a storage section 204, and acommunication control section 207. The control execution section 201receives a control command from the home controller 100 or the server300, and controls the device 200 in accordance with the received controlcommand. The content of control of the device 200 performed by thecontrol execution section 201 differs in accordance with the type of thedevice 200. For example, if the device 200 is an illumination device,the control execution section 201 turns on and off the illuminationdevice. In addition, the control execution section 201 transmits theresult of execution of the control command and the state of the device200 to the home controller 100 or the server 300.

The state management section 202 manages the state of the device 200.The content of management of the device 200 performed by the statemanagement section 202 differs in accordance with the type of the device200. For example, if the device 200 is an illumination device, the statemanagement section 202 manages whether the illumination device iscurrently turned on or turned off. The storage section 204 storesinformation related to the state of the device 200 managed by the statemanagement section 202. The communication control section 207 controlscommunication between the device 200 and the home controller 100 andcommunication between the device 200 and the server 300. In addition,the communication control section 207 transmits a variety of data to thehome controller 100 or the server 300 upon receiving a request totransmit such data from other blocks, and receives data transmitted fromthe home controller 100 or the server 300 to deliver the data to therelevant block.

As shown in FIG. 3, the server 300 includes a home informationmanagement section 301, a device control section 302, a storage section304, and a communication control section 307. The home informationmanagement section 301 manages the home information 2700 to be discussedlater for each house or each user account. In addition, the homeinformation management section 301 transmits the home information 2700to the home controller 100 in response to a request from the homecontroller 100. Further, the home information management section 301acquires log information related to the use history of the device 200and information related to the state of the device 200 from the device200, stores the acquired information in the storage section 304, andmanages the information.

The device control section 302 transmits a control command to the device200 in response to a request from the home controller 100. The storagesection 304 stores information that is necessary for operation of theserver 300 such as the home information 2700 and the information relatedto the state of the device 200 managed by the home informationmanagement section 301. The communication control section 307 controlscommunication between the server 300 and the home controller 100 andcommunication between the server 300 and the device 200 as with thecommunication control section 107. In addition, the communicationcontrol section 307 transmits a variety of data to the home controller100 or the device 200 upon receiving a request to transmit such datafrom other blocks, and receives data transmitted from the homecontroller 100 or the device 200 to deliver the data to the relevantblock.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the form ofimplementation of the home controller 100. As shown in FIG. 4, the homecontroller 100 includes an application 401, an OS (Operating System)402, a memory 403, and other hardware (not shown).

The application 401 is application software for causing the portableinformation terminal to function as the home controller 100, and isexecuted by a processor of the home controller 100. The home controller100 may read the application 401 from a computer readable recordingmedium to implement the application 401, or may download the application401 from a network to implement the application 401. The OS 402 is basicsoftware of the portable information terminal, and is executed by theprocessor of the home controller 100. The memory 403 is formed from astorage device such as a RAM and a ROM of the home controller 100, andstores a group of data included in the application 401. The processor ofthe home controller 100 executes the application 401 to embody thefunctions of the touch panel control section 102, the display controlsection 103, the storage section 104, the device management section 105,the device control section 106, and the communication control section107 shown in FIG. 3. In addition, the processor of the home controller100 executes the application 401 to cause the memory 403 to function asthe storage section 104.

It should be noted, however, that in the present disclosure, the homecontroller 100 may be implemented by the application 401 alone, may beimplemented by the application 401 and the OS 402, may be implemented bythe application 401, the OS 402, and the memory 403, or may beimplemented by the application 401, the OS 402, the memory 403, andother hardware (not shown). In any present disclosure, the homecontroller 100 according to the present disclosure can be embodied. Inthe present disclosure, the processor and the storage device forming theportable information terminal, for example, form a computer. One of aCPU, an FPGA, and an ASIC or a combination of two or more of these maybe adopted as the processor. One of a ROM, a RAM, and a hard disk or acombination of two or more of these may be adopted as the storagedevice.

FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen of thehome controller 100. As shown in FIG. 5, the basic screen of the homecontroller 100 displayed on the display 101 include a floor plan 500,device icons 501, and a device list display change button 503. The floorplan 500 is a plan view that planarly represents the arrangement and theshape of one or more rooms forming each floor of a house. In the casewhere the house has one or more floors, the floor plan 500 is preparedfor each floor. For example, in the case where the house has two floors,two floor plans 500, namely a floor plan 601 for the first floor and afloor plan 602 for the second floor, are displayed on the display 101 asshown in FIG. 6.

The device icon 501 is an icon displayed as overlapped on the floor plan500 and representing the device 200. When the touch panel controlsection 102 senses a tap on the device icon 501 performed by the user,the display control section 103 causes the display 101 to display adevice control screen 502 to be discussed later. This allows the user tocontrol the device 200 by operating the device control screen 502.

The device icon 501 is prepared for each device 200. The display controlsection 103 disposes the device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 on thebasis of the actual arrangement of the device 200 within the house.Information as to at what position on the floor plan 500 the device icon501 is to be disposed is registered in an arrangement 3104 of a devicelist 3100 to be discussed later. Here, a position on the floor plan 500corresponding to the actual arrangement position of the device 200 isregistered in the arrangement 3104. Thus, the display control section103 can dispose the device icon 501 at a position on the floor plan 500corresponding to the actual arrangement position of the device 200 bydisposing the device icon 501 at the position registered in thearrangement 3104 of the device list 3100.

In the floor plan 500 shown in FIG. 5, one floor is partitioned into aplurality of rooms by partition lines that indicate partitions betweenthe rooms. This allows the user to recognize what device 200 is disposedin what room at a glance.

In the example of FIG. 5, in addition, schematic images of furniturepieces are displayed at positions on the floor plan 500 corresponding tothe actual arrangement positions of the furniture pieces. An image thatindicates the movable range of a door is displayed at a position on thefloor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement position of thedoor. An image of a staircase is displayed at a position on the floorplan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangement position of thestaircase. This allows the user to recognize the positions of thefurniture pieces disposed in each room and the positions of thestaircase and the doors on the floor.

The button with a text “TO LIST UI” displayed at the lower right of thebasic screen is the device list display change button 503, which is abutton for switching the screen display from the basic screen to adevice list display screen to be discussed later (see FIG. 24). When thetouch panel control section 102 senses a tap on the device list displaychange button 503 performed by the user, the display control section 103switches the screen display on the display 101 from the basic screen tothe device list display screen. It should be noted, however, that thedisplay control section 103 may hide the device list display changebutton 503 in the case where a registration is made in the homecontroller 100 in advance that the device list display screen is notutilized.

In the foregoing description, one device icon 501 is correlated with onedevice 200. However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto, andone device icon 501 may be correlated with a plurality of devices 200 sothat the one device icon 501 may be used in common to the plurality ofdevices 200. For example, in the case where there are two illuminationdevices in a living room, the two illumination devices may berepresented by one device icon 501.

In this case, when the device icon 501 representing the two illuminationdevices is tapped on by the user, the display control section 103 causesthe display 101 to display a device control screen 502 that allowssimultaneous control of the two illumination devices. This allows theuser to control the two illumination devices at the same time. Aplurality of illumination devices are often disposed in a large roomsuch as the living room. In the case where the user turns on or off theillumination devices in the living room, the user often turns on or offall the illumination devices disposed in the living room, rather thanturning on or off some of the illumination devices. In this case, if itis possible to collectively turn on or off all the illumination devices,the number of operations to be performed by the user can be reduced.Thus, one device icon 501 may be correlated with a plurality of devices200 that are highly likely to be operated by the user at the same timeto cause one device control screen 502 to be displayed.

In the case where the device icon 501 represents a plurality of devices200, the display control section 103 may display the device icon 501 ata position on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actual arrangementposition of one of the devices 200. Alternatively, the display controlsection 103 may display the device icon 501 representing the pluralityof devices 200 at a predetermined location of a room in which theplurality of devices 200 are disposed.

In order to dispose the device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 on thebasis of the actual arrangement of the device 200 within the house, theuser moves the device icon 501 to an appropriate position on the floorplan 500. The user can move the device icon 501 to a desired position bydragging the device icon 501 while holding down the device icon 501.These operations are executed at the timing when the device icon 501 isadded such as when the home controller 100 is initially utilized andwhen a new device 200 is purchased.

Specifically, when the touch panel control section 102 senses a drag onthe device icon 501, the device management section 105 registers theposition on the floor plan 500 of the device icon 501 after the movementin the arrangement 3104 of the device list 3100 to be discussed later.This allows a position on the floor plan 500 corresponding to the actualarrangement position of the device 200 to be registered in thearrangement 3104.

The initial display position of the device icon 501 may be determined inadvance by the system, and may be a predetermined position outside thedisplay region of the floor plan 500 or a predetermined position withina predetermined room on the floor plan 500, for example. The method ofdisposing the device icon 501 on the floor plan 500 on the basis of theactual arrangement of the device 200 within the house is not limitedthereto, and the method described below may be used.

As shown in FIGS. 7, 8, and 9, some floor plans 500 include arrangementinformation for the device icons 501. For example, in the example of thefloor plan 500 of FIG. 7, texts that indicate the type of the devices200 represented by the device icons 501 to be disposed are provided atpositions at which the device icons 501 are to be disposed. In theexample of the floor plan 500 of FIG. 8, images that indicate the typeof the devices 200 represented by the device icons 501 to be disposedare provided at positions at which the device icons 501 are to bedisposed. In the example of the floor plan 500 of FIG. 9, simplifiedimages such as circles and rectangles that indicate the type of thedevices 200 represented by the device icons 501 to be disposed areprovided at positions at which the device icons 501 are to be disposed.

Consequently, in the case where the floor plan 500 includes arrangementinformation for the device icons 501, the display control section 103may generate the basic screen of FIG. 5 by automatically disposing thedevice icons 501 on the floor plan 500 on the basis of the arrangementinformation included in the floor plan 500. In this case, it is notnecessary for the user to perform an operation of moving the deviceicons 501 to appropriate positions on the floor plan 500.

For example, in an exemplary floor plan 4401 for the first floor of FIG.7, the display control section 103 detects a position provided with atext “TELEVISION SET”, automatically disposes the device icon 501 forthe television set at the detected position, and registers the detectedposition in the arrangement 3104 of the device list 3100.

In an exemplary floor plan 4501 for the first floor of FIG. 8, thedisplay control section 103 detects a position provided with an imagefor the “television set”, automatically disposes the device icon 501 forthe television set at the detected position, and registers the detectedposition in the arrangement 3104 of the device list 3100. In anexemplary floor plan 4601 for the first floor of FIG. 9, the displaycontrol section 103 detects a position provided with an image in theshape of a “circle filled with oblique lines”, automatically disposesthe device icon 501 for the television set at the detected position, andregisters the detected position in the arrangement 3104 of the devicelist 3100.

The display control section 103 may detect the display position ofarrangement information by recognizing the arrangement informationincluded in the floor plan 500 using a text recognition technology or animage recognition technology commonly utilized.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a method of switching the floordisplay on the basic screen of the home controller 100. FIG. 10illustrates a case where the house has two floors, namely the firstfloor and the second floor. With a floor plan 601 for the first floordisplayed on the basic screen of the home controller 100, the touchpanel control section 102 senses a tap on a staircase region 603 on thefirst floor performed by the user. Then, the display control section 103switches the floor display on the basic screen from the first floor tothe second floor. Similarly, with a floor plan 602 for the second floordisplayed on the basic screen of the home controller 100, the touchpanel control section 102 senses a tap on a staircase region 604 on thesecond floor performed by the user. Then, the display control section103 switches the floor display on the basic screen from the second floorto the first floor.

Here, the touch panel control section 102 may judge that the staircaseregion 603 is tapped on if the position tapped on by the user ispositioned within a region surrounded by four vertexes of a staircaseregistered in a room type 2902 of room information 2900 (see FIG. 32).

Further, the floor display may be switched by not only tapping on thestaircase region 603 but also a swipe operation on the display 101. Withthe floor plan 601 for the first floor displayed on the basic screen ofthe home controller 100, the touch panel control section 102 senses aswipe operation performed from the right to the left on the display 101by the user. Then, the display control section 103 switches the floordisplay on the basic screen from the first floor to the second floor.Similarly, with the floor plan 602 for the second floor displayed on thebasic screen of the home controller 100, the touch panel control section102 senses a swipe operation performed from the left to the right on thedisplay 101 by the user. Then, the display control section 103 switchesthe floor display on the basic screen from the second floor to the firstfloor. The floor display may be switched by a swipe operation in thevertical direction.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the configuration of the display state ofthe device control screen 502 of the home controller 100. In the basicscreen shown in FIG. 5, when the touch panel control section 102 sensesthat the user selects the device icon 501, the display control section103 causes the display 101 to display the device control screen 502corresponding to the selected device icon 501. The device control screen502 is a control screen that is specific to each device 200 and thatallows control or confirmation of the state of the device 200. Forexample, in FIG. 11, a device icon 801 for the air conditioner isselected by the user, and the temperature setting and the air flowdirection are controlled using the device control screen 502 for the airconditioner.

An image of the air conditioner is displayed in the device controlscreen 502 to allow the user to immediately recognize that the devicecontrol screen 502 corresponds to the air conditioner. This prevents anerroneous operation. An image that indicates the air flow direction isdisplayed on the lower side of the image of the air conditioner to allowthe user to select a desired air flow direction by repeatedly tapping onthe image, for example. A numeral displayed within the device controlscreen 502 indicates the current set temperature of the air conditioner.A button in the shape of a triangle that points upward in the devicecontrol screen 502 is a temperature increase button. A button in theshape of a triangle that points downward is a temperature decreasebutton. Pressing the temperature increase button once increases the settemperature of the air conditioner by a predetermined temperature (forexample, 0.5 degrees). Pressing the temperature decrease button oncedecreases the set temperature of the air conditioner by a predeterminedtemperature (for example, 0.5 degrees).

Examples of the method of disposing the device icons 501 in the displaystate of the device control screen 502 include the following methods.

A first method is to dispose the device icons 501 outside the displayregion of the device control screen 502 as shown in FIG. 11. When thetouch panel control section 102 senses that a certain device icon 501 istapped on by the user, the display control section 103 disposes all thedevice icons 501 at locations outside the display region of the devicecontrol screen 502 and inside the display region of the display 101irrespective of whether or not the locations are inside the displayregion of the floor plan 500. In the example of FIG. 11, the deviceicons 501 are disposed in an elliptical arrangement so as to surroundthe device control screen 502. That is, when a certain device icon 501is selected by the user and the device control screen 502 for the device200 corresponding to the device icon 501 is displayed, the displaycontrol section 103 retracts all the device icons 501 out of the displayregion of the device control screen 502.

This prevents the device icons 501 from being hidden by the devicecontrol screen 502. Therefore, in the case where the device controlscreen 502 for a device 200 is currently displayed and the user attemptsto cause the device control screen 502 for another device 200 to bedisplayed, it is not necessary for the user to temporarily erase thecurrently displayed device control screen 502 and search for the deviceicon 501 for the relevant device 200.

Here, the display control section 103 may decide the arrangementposition of each device icon 501 on the outer periphery of an ellipsehaving a shape determined in advance in accordance with the size of thedevice control screen 502, and dispose the device icon 501 at thedecided position, for example. Examples of the method of deciding thearrangement position include a method of arranging all the device icons501 as display targets at equal intervals on the outer periphery of anellipse, and a method of disposing the device icons 501 such that theangles formed by lines connecting between adjacent device icons 501 andthe center of an ellipse are equal to each other. Alternatively, thedisplay control section 103 may divide the outer periphery of an ellipseinto four sections corresponding to the upper, lower, left, and rightportions of the device control screen 502, and dispose the device icons501 such that the number of device icons 501 in each section is the sameand the device icons 501 in each section are arranged at equalintervals. The device icon 501 disposed at the closest position on thefloor plan 500 may be disposed at the decided arrangement position.

In the foregoing description, the device icons 501 are arranged in anelliptical arrangement. However, the present disclosure is not limitedthereto, and the device icons 501 may be arranged in a circulararrangement. Also in this case, the arrangement position of the deviceicons 501 may be decided using the same method as in the case where thedevice icons 501 are arranged in an elliptical arrangement. Otherexamples of the shape of arrangement of the device icons 501 used whenthe device icons 501 are retracted out of the display region of thedevice control screen 502 include polygonal arrangements such astriangular, rectangular, and pentagonal arrangements.

A second method is to dispose the device icons 501 in one line outsidethe display region of the device control screen 502 and the floor plan500 and inside the display region of the display 101 as shown in FIG.13. When the touch panel control section 102 senses that a certaindevice icon 501 is tapped on by the user, the display control section103 disposes all the device icons 501 in one vertical line on the leftside of the display region of the floor plan 500. That is, the displaycontrol section 103 retracts all the device icons 501 to a vacant spaceoutside the display region of the floor plan 500 and inside the displayregion of the display 101.

In FIG. 13, the device icons 501 are disposed on the left side of thefloor plan 500. However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto,and the device icons 501 may be disposed in one vertical line on theright side of the floor plan 500, or may be disposed in one horizontalline on the upper or lower side of the floor plan 500.

In the case where all the device icons 501 cannot be disposed on theleft side of the floor plan 500, the display control section 103 mayscroll the device icons 501 upward or downward in accordance with aswipe operation performed upward or downward on the device icons 501disposed in one vertical line on the left side to cause the device icons501, which have been hidden, to be displayed within the display 101.

This allows the device icons 501, which have been hidden, to bedisplayed within the display 101 to allow the user to select the deviceicons 501. In the case where the device icons 501 are displayed in onehorizontal line and all the device icons 501 may not displayed, thedisplay control section 103 may scroll the device icons 501 leftward orrightward in accordance with a swipe operation performed leftward orrightward on the device icons 501 disposed in one horizontal line tocause the device icons 501, which have been hidden, to be displayedwithin the display 101.

In the display state of the device control screen 502, the displaycontrol section 103 may display the device icon 501 selected by the userin a display mode that is different from that for the unselected deviceicons 501. This allows the user to easily recognize the selected deviceicon 501.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11, the display control section 103 maydisplay the selected device icon 801 in a color that is different fromthat of the other unselected device icons 501. Specifically, the displaycontrol section 103 may display a background portion of the selecteddevice icon 501 in a color that is different from that of backgroundportions of the unselected device icons 501. It should be noted,however, that such a display mode is merely exemplary, and the displaycontrol section 103 may make the selected device icon 501 brighter thanthe unselected device icons 501, may make the selected device icon 501denser than the unselected device icons 501, or may cause the selecteddevice icon 501 to flash on and off at a constant cycle.

In the display state of the device control screen 502, the device icon501 selected by the user may be disposed as distinguished from theunselected device icons 501. This allows the user to easily recognizethe selected device icon 501.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12, the display control section 103 maydispose a selected device icon 901 at the uppermost position on theouter periphery of an ellipse. Besides, for example, the display controlsection 103 may dispose the selected device icon 501 at a particularposition (for example, the lowermost position, the rightmost position,or the leftmost position) on the outer periphery of an ellipse. In anyevent, the display control section 103 may dispose the device icon 501selected by the user at a particular location that is easilyrecognizable by the user.

Besides, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the display control section103 may scroll an array of the device icons 501 such that a selecteddevice icon 1101 is disposed within the display region of the display101. In the example of FIG. 14, the device icons 501 are scrolled suchthat the selected device icon 1101 is disposed at the center of a lineof icons displayed in one vertical line on the left side of the floorplan 500. This allows the user to easily recognize the selected deviceicon 501. Although the device icon 1101 is disposed at the center of theline of icons in FIG. 14, the device icon 1101 may be disposed at anyother conspicuous position. For example, the device icon 1101 may bedisposed at the top or bottom position of the line of icons.

The order of arrangement of the device icons 501 taken when the deviceicons 501 are retracted out of the display region of the floor plan 500may be determined such that devices 200 that are closer in position ofarrangement on the floor plan 500 to the device icon 501 selected by theuser are disposed to be closer in order of arrangement to the selecteddevice icon 501. Alternatively, the order of arrangement of the deviceicons 501 may be determined such that the device icons 501 for devices200 that are more likely to be used together with the device 200selected by the user are disposed to be closer in order of arrangementto the device icon 501 for the device 200 selected by the user. Forexample, the television set and the Blu-ray recorder are highly likelyto be used together by the user. Therefore, when the device icon 501 forthe television set is selected by the user, the device icon 501 for theBlu-ray recorder may be displayed next to the device icon 501 for thetelevision set. In order to embody such a configuration, a table thatindicates combinations of devices 200 that are highly likely to be usedtogether may be stored in advance in the storage section 104, and thearrangement of the device icons 501 may be decided in accordance withthe table.

In any of the methods of disposing the device icons 501 taken when thedevice control screen 502 is displayed described above, in addition, thedisplay control section 103 may dispose the device icons 501 as groupedunder particular conditions.

For example, in FIG. 15, the device icons 501 are grouped in accordancewith the location at which the devices 200 are disposed. The devices 200disposed in the living room are grouped as device icons 1201. Thedevices 200 disposed in a lavatory are grouped as device icons 1202. Thedevices 200 disposed in a bedroom are grouped as device icons 1203.Then, the display order is set to each group, and the grouped deviceicons 501 are disposed in one vertical line on the left side of thefloor plan 500 in accordance with the display order. The display orderof the groups may be determined such that groups that are positionedcloser to the room in which the device 200 selected by the user isdisposed are closer in display order to the group for the room in whichthe device 200 selected by the user is disposed.

Besides, the display control section 103 may dispose the device icons501 as grouped in accordance with the type of the devices 200. Forexample, in FIG. 16, two device icons 501 for the television set aredisposed on the left side of the floor plan 500 as grouped as deviceicons 2301, and two device icons 501 for the air conditioner aredisposed on the left side of the floor plan 500 as grouped as deviceicons 2302 for the air conditioner. Consequently, the display controlsection 103 may group the device icons 501 in accordance with the devicetype by disposing the device icons 501 for the devices 200 of the sametype to be continuous.

The display control section 103 may discriminate the type of the devices200 in accordance with the content registered in a device type 3102 ofthe device list 3100 (see FIG. 35).

Although the device icons 501 for the devices 200 of the same type aregrouped into one group in the foregoing description, the presentdisclosure is not limited thereto. For example, the display controlsection 103 may classify the devices 200 into categories matching thedevice type, group the device icons 501 in accordance with the category,and dispose the device icons 501 on the left side of the floor plan 500in groups.

For example, as shown in the lower left of FIG. 16, three device icons501 for the refrigerator, a microwave oven, and a dish washing/dryingmachine are classified into a cooking device category, and therefore thethree device icons are grouped as device icons 2303 for the cookingdevices and disposed on the left side of the floor plan 500.

Examples of the other categories include entertainment devices andair-conditioning devices. The entertainment device category includesdevices 200 such as a television set, a recorder, a player, and a hometheater system. The air-conditioning device category includes devices200 such as an air conditioner, an air purifier, a humidifier, adehumidifier, and a home air circulation system.

For example, if the device icons 501 for the television set, therecorder, the air conditioner, and the air purifier are disposed on thefloor plan 500 and the device icon 501 for the television set isselected by the user, the device icons 501 for the television set andthe recorder classified into the entertainment device category aregrouped into one group and disposed on the left side of the floor plan500, and the device icons 501 for the air conditioner and the airpurifier classified into the air-conditioning device category aregrouped into one group and disposed on the left side of the floor plan500.

The display control section 103 may determine the category of thedevices 200 from the content registered in the device type 3102 of thedevice list 3100. In this case, a classification table for determiningthe category of the devices 200 from the content registered in thedevice type 3102 may be stored in advance in the storage section 104,and the display control section 103 may reference the classificationtable to discriminate the category of the devices 200.

A variety of manners of classifying the devices 200 according to thedevice type may be adopted besides that described above. For example, asshown in FIG. 24, the devices 200 may be classified into householdappliance, air-conditioning, and facility categories.

The method of grouping the device icons 501 on the basis of particularconditions and disposing the device icons 501 as described above mayalso be applied to the display mode in which the device icons 501 areretracted so as to surround the device control screen 502 as shown inFIG. 11.

FIGS. 17A and 17B are each a diagram showing a method of displaying thefloor plan 500 with the device control screen 502 displayed. As shown inFIGS. 17A and 17B, there are two types of the method of displaying thefloor plan 500. In a first display method, as shown in FIG. 17A, theentire floor plan 500 is covered by a translucent gray layer (in thedrawing, indicated by dots).

In this case, the background of the device control screen 502 is turnedinto a gray color to emphasize the device control screen 502, whichallows the user to more definitely recognize the device control screen502. In addition, the gray layer is translucent, and the floor plan 500is not completely hidden. This allows the device control screen 502 tobe operated with presence. The gray layer is image data having a colorwith low brightness such as gray and set to predetermined transparency.

The display control section 103 may decide the display order of thedevice control screen 502, the gray layer, and the floor plan 500 suchthat the device control screen 502 is the uppermost layer and the floorplan 500 is the lowermost layer, and synthesize these images. Thisprevents the device control screen 502 from being displayed as coveredby the gray layer.

In a second display method, as shown in FIG. 17B, a non-control targetregion 1302 in the floor plan 500 is covered by a translucent gray layer(the region with dots in the drawing), and a control target region 1301is not covered by the translucent gray layer. This allows the user tooperate the device control screen 502 while being conscious of thecontrol target region 1301, which allows operation with presence. Here,the control target region 1301 refers to a region on the floor plan 500that corresponds to a room in which the device 200 represented by thedevice icon 501 selected by the user is disposed, and the non-controltarget region 1302 refers to a region on the floor plan 500 other thanthe room. For example, in the case where the control target device isthe air conditioner installed in the living room, the control targetregion 1301 is the region on the floor plan 500 corresponding to theliving room, and the non-control target region 1302 is the region on thefloor plan 500 other than the living room.

For example, it is assumed that the user selects the device icon 501 forthe air conditioner with a device ID 3101 of A shown in FIG. 35. In thiscase, the display control section 103 specifies the position (X10, Y100,Z1) of the air conditioner from the content registered in thearrangement 3104 of the air conditioner. Next, the display controlsection 103 references the room information 2900 to decide in which roomthe specified position (X10, Y100, Z1) is positioned. Here, it isassumed that the position (X10, Y100, Z1) is positioned within a regionsurrounded by vertexes with vertex IDs of F, G, H, I, L, O, and N. Then,the display control section 103 determines that the air conditioner isdisposed in the living room with a room ID of A. Then, the displaycontrol section 103 generates a gray layer with the region of the livingroom defined as the control target region 1301 and with the region onthe floor plan 500 other than the living room defined as the non-controltarget region 1302.

Next, transition between the display state of the basic screen and thedisplay state of the device control screen 502 will be described usingFIG. 18. In the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 18, theuser selects the device icon 501 for the device 200 (here, the airconditioner) that is desired to be controlled, and the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses the selection. Then, as shown in the rightdiagram of FIG. 18, the display control section 103 displays the devicecontrol screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 asoverlapped on the floor plan 500. This results in transition from thedisplay state of the basic screen to the display state of the devicecontrol screen 502.

On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 18, in thedisplay state of the device control screen 502, the user taps on thedevice icon 501 for the air conditioner corresponding to the devicecontrol screen 502 or a location outside the display region of thedevice control screen 502 (for example, the display region of the floorplan 500 outside the display region of the device control screen 502),and the touch panel control section 102 senses the tap. Then, as shownin the left diagram of FIG. 18, the display control section 103 erasesthe device control screen 502, and returns from the display state of thedevice control screen 502 to the display state of the basic screen. Atthis time, the display control section 103 returns the device icon 501to the original arrangement position on the floor plan 500).

The operation described above is the same for the floor plan 500 for anyfloor displayed in the basic screen. For example, as shown in the leftdiagram of FIG. 19, in the case where the basic screen displays thefloor plan 602 for the second floor, the user taps on the device icon501 for the device 200 (here, the air conditioner) that is desired to becontrolled, and the touch panel control section 102 senses the tap.Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 19, the display controlsection 103 displays the device control screen 502 corresponding to theselected device icon 501 as overlapped on the floor plan 602 for thesecond floor.

On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 19, in thedisplay state of the device control screen 502 for the air conditioner,the user taps on the device icon 501 for the air conditionercorresponding to the device control screen 502 being displayed or alocation outside the display region of the device control screen 502(for example, the display region of the floor plan 500 outside thedisplay region of the device control screen 502), and the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses the tap. Then, as shown in the left diagramof FIG. 19, the display control section 103 erases the device controlscreen 502, and returns from the display state of the device controlscreen 502 to the display state of the basic screen in which the floorplan 602 for the second floor is displayed.

Next, a method of switching from the display state of a certain devicecontrol screen 502 to the display state of another device control screen502 will be described using FIG. 20. As shown in the left diagram ofFIG. 20, in the display state of the device control screen 502 for theair conditioner, the user taps on the device icon 501 for the washingmachine which is different from the device icon 501 for the airconditioner, and the touch panel control section 102 senses the tap.Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 20, the display controlsection 103 erases the device control screen 502 which has beendisplayed, and displays the device control screen 502 corresponding tothe device icon 501 for the washing machine as overlapped on the floorplan 500. Switching in the opposite direction is performed in the samemanner.

Consequently, when the user successively selects different device icons501, switching is successively performed between the device controlscreens 502, which allows the user to successively control differentdevices 200. That is, in causing another device control screen 502 to bedisplayed while a certain device control screen 502 is displayed, it isno longer necessary for the user to input an operation of erasing thecertain device control screen 502, and switching can be performedbetween the device control screens 502 with one touch operation.

In the display state of the device control screen 502, in the case wherethe user taps on the device icon 501 corresponding to the device controlscreen 502 being displayed, the display control section 103 may onlyerase the device control screen 502, and may not return to the basicscreen. Such screen transition is shown in FIG. 21.

In the left diagram of FIG. 21, the device icon 501 for the airconditioner is selected by the user, and therefore the device controlscreen 502 for the air conditioner is displayed, and all the deviceicons 501 are displayed in one vertical line on the left side of thefloor plan 500. In this state, the user taps on the device icon 501 forthe air conditioner, and the touch panel control section 102 senses thetap. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 21, the display controlsection 103 erases only the device control screen 502 for the airconditioner with the device icons 501 kept displayed in one verticalline. In this case, the device icons 501 do not move onto the floor plan500, and therefore a user's desire to cause only the floor plan 500 tobe displayed may be met.

On the other hand, in the hidden state of the device control screen 502,the user selects a desired device icon 501, and the touch panel controlsection 102 senses the selection. Then, the display control section 103displays the device control screen 502 corresponding to the selecteddevice icon 501. For example, in the right diagram of FIG. 21, when theuser selects the device icon 501 for the air conditioner from the deviceicons 501 disposed in one vertical line on the left side of the floorplan 500, the device control screen 502 for the air conditioner isdisplayed as shown in the left diagram of FIG. 21.

Next, transition from the display state of the basic screen to thedisplay state of the device control screen 502 represented through ananimation will be described using FIG. 22. As shown in the upper leftdiagram of FIG. 22, the user selects the device icon 501 for the airconditioner, for example, in the basic screen. Then, the display controlsection 103 gradually lowers the transparency of the device controlscreen 502 for the air conditioner in the order of the upper rightdiagram, the lower right diagram, and the lower left diagram of FIG. 22to a final transparency of 0. At the same time, the display controlsection 103 moves all the device icons 501 onto the outer periphery ofan ellipse that surrounds the device control screen 502.

Next, transition from the display state of the basic screen to thedisplay state of the device control screen 502 represented through ananimation will be described using FIG. 23. As shown in the upper leftdiagram of FIG. 23, the user selects the device icon 501 for the device200 which is the air conditioner, for example, in the basic screen.Then, the display control section 103 gradually decreases thetransparency of the device control screen 502 for the air conditioner inthe order of the upper right diagram, the lower right diagram, and thelower left diagram of FIG. 23 to a final transparency of 0. At the sametime, the display control section 103 moves all the device icons to theleft side of the floor plan 500.

Consequently, representing the screen transition through an animationcan enhance the interest of the user in operating the device controlscreen 502 through screen rendering shown since the device icon 501 isselected until the device control screen 502 is displayed.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list displayscreen. The device list display screen is displayed when the user tapson the device list display change button 503 in the basic screen shownin FIG. 5.

As shown in FIG. 24, the device list display screen includes a devicelist 2000, device details icons 2001, and a basic screen display button2003.

When the user taps on the device details icon 2001 and the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses the tap, the display control section 103causes the device control screen 502 to be displayed as overlapped onthe device list 2000. This allows the user to cause the device controlscreen 502 to be displayed and operate the device 200 as in the casewhere the device icon 501 is tapped on.

The device details icon 2001 is prepared for each device 200. The devicedetails icon 2001 is different from the device icon 501 in representingnot only an image representing the device 200 but also the on/off stateand the operation state of the device 200. For example, the devicedetails icon 2001 for the refrigerator displayed in the upper left ofFIG. 24 displays not only an image of the refrigerator but also “ON”,which indicates that the refrigerator is currently turned on, and“OPERATION/ICE”, which indicates that the refrigerator is currentlymaking ice.

In the device list 2000, the device details icons 2001 are displayed asclassified on the basis of a classification criterion determined inadvance. Examples of the classification criterion determined in advanceinclude the type of the device 200, the room in which the device 200 isdisposed, and the status of use of the device 200. In FIG. 24, the typeof the device 200 is used as the classification criterion, and thedevice details icons 2001 are classified into three categories, namelythe household appliance, air-conditioning, and facility categories.

In the example of FIG. 24, the refrigerator, an electric toothbrush, thewashing machine, and the television set are classified into thehousehold appliance category, the air conditioner and the air purifierare classified into the air-conditioning category, and the toilet, theillumination device, and the bath are classified into the facilitycategory. In this case, a classification table that determines intowhich of the household appliance, air-conditioning, and facilitycategories each device 200 is classified on the basis of the contentregistered in the device type 3102 of the device list 3100 (see FIG. 35)is stored in advance in the storage section 104. Then, the displaycontrol section 103 may reference the classification table to classifyeach device into a category.

Returning to FIG. 24, the button with a text “TO FLOOR PLAN UI”displayed at the lower right of the device list 2000 is the basic screendisplay button 2003. The basic screen display button 2003 is a buttonfor switching the screen from the device list display screen to thebasic screen.

Although switching can be made between the basic screen and the devicelist display screen in the foregoing description, the device listdisplay screen may be utilized as the basic screen in place of the basicscreen shown in FIG. 5. In this case, the basic screen display button2003 may be omitted.

In the foregoing description, one device details icon 2001 is correlatedwith one device 200. However, the present disclosure is not limitedthereto, and one device details icon 2001 may be correlated with aplurality of devices 200 so that the one device details icon 2001 may beused in common to the plurality of devices 200. For example, in the casewhere there are two illumination devices in a living room, the twoillumination devices may be represented by one device details icon 2001.

In this case, when the device details icon 2001 representing the twoillumination devices is tapped on by the user, the display controlsection 103 causes the display 101 to display a device control screen502 that allows simultaneous control of the two illumination devices. Inthis case, the same effect as that obtained in the case where one deviceicon 501 is used in common to a plurality of devices 200 is obtained. Inthe case where one device details icon 2001 is used in common to aplurality of illumination devices, the device details icon 2001 maydisplay the on/off state and the operation state of each of twoillumination devices.

In the basic screen, the device details icon 2001 may be used in placeof the device icon 501. In the device list display screen, the deviceicon 501 may be used in place of the device details icon 2001. Inaddition, the device control screen 502 displayed in the case where thedevice details icon 2001 is selected and the device control screen 502displayed in the case where the device icon 501 is selected may be thesame as or different from each other. For example, the device detailsicon 2001 contains more information than that of the device icon 501,and therefore the device control screen 502 displayed in the case wherethe device details icon 2001 is selected may include more buttons andstates than those of the device control screen 502 displayed in the casewhere the device icon 501 is selected.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing screen transition between the basic screenand the device list display screen. In the basic screen shown in theleft diagram of FIG. 25, when the device list display change button 503is selected by the user, display on the display 101 is switched to thedevice list display screen shown in the right diagram of FIG. 25. On theother hand, in the device list display screen shown in the right diagramof FIG. 25, when the basic screen display button 2003 is selected by theuser, display on the display 101 is switched to the basic screen shownin the left diagram of FIG. 25.

Specifically, when the touch panel control section 102 senses a tap onthe basic screen display button 2003, the display control section 103switches the display screen on the display 101 to the basic screen fromthe device list display screen. On the other hand, in the display stateof the basic screen, when the touch panel control section 102 senses atap on the device list display change button 503, the display controlsection 103 switches the display screen on the display 101 from thebasic screen to the device list display screen.

For example, in the case where the device list display screen isselected for display, and in the case where the user attempts to operatethe television set located in front of the user, the device list displayscreen includes only one device details icon 2001 for the television setif there is only one television set in the house. This allows the userto directly select the device details icon 2001 for the television setwithout an erroneous operation, and to cause the device control screen502 corresponding to the television set to be displayed.

On the other hand, in the case where the device list display screen isselected, the device list display screen focuses on the individualdevices 200, and thus the relationship between the device 200 and thelocation at which the device 200 is disposed is unclear, although it ispossible to operate or confirm the state of the individual devices 200.Therefore, for a plurality of devices 200 installed within the samebuilding, such as the air conditioners or the illumination devices, forexample, it is unclear the air conditioner or the illumination device inwhich room is the control target, which may incur an erroneousoperation.

Thus, in the present disclosure, the basic screen is provided inaddition to the device list display screen to allow selection from thebasic screen and the device list display screen.

Consequently, in the case where the basic screen is selected, therelationship between the device 200 and the location at which the device200 is disposed is made definite. Therefore, also for a plurality ofdevices 200 of the same type installed in the same building, such as theair conditioners or illumination devices, for example, a discriminationas to the air conditioner or the illumination device in which room isthe control target is facilitated. This prevents the air conditioner orthe illumination device installed in a room that is different from thedesired room from being erroneously operated.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing screen transition between the display stateof the device list display screen and the display state of the devicecontrol screen 502. In the device list display screen shown in the leftdiagram of FIG. 26, the user selects the device details icon 2001 forthe device 200 (here, the air conditioner) that is desired to becontrolled, and the touch panel control section 102 senses theselection. Then, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 26, the displaycontrol section 103 displays the device control screen 502 for the airconditioner corresponding to the selected device details icon 2001 asoverlapped on the device list display screen. This results in transitionfrom the display state of the device list display screen to the displaystate of the device control screen 502.

In the example in the right drawing of FIG. 26, the display controlsection 103 hides the device details icons 2001 for devices other thanthe air conditioner selected by the user, and only the device detailsicon 2001 for the air conditioner is displayed at a position that isdifferent from that in the device control screen 502. This allows theuser to definitely recognize the device details icon 2001 that the userhimself/herself selected.

On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 26, in thedisplay state of the device control screen 502, the user selects thedevice details icon 2001 for the air conditioner, and the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses the selection. Then, as shown in the leftdiagram of FIG. 26, the display control section 103 erases the devicecontrol screen 502, and returns from the display state of the devicecontrol screen 502 to the display state of the device list displayscreen.

Although only one device details icon 2001 is displayed in the displaystate of the device control screen 502 shown in the right diagram ofFIG. 26, other device details icons 2001 that are not selected by theuser may be displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 13. In this case,the plurality of device details icons 2001 may be displayed in one lineat an end of the screen as shown in FIG. 13, or may be displayed so asto surround the device control screen 502 as shown in FIG. 12.

According to the configuration, the user can successively select thedevice details icons 2001 in the display state of the device controlscreen 502 to successively display other device control screens 502.Consequently, in causing another device control screen 502 to bedisplayed while a certain device control screen 502 is displayed, it isno longer necessary for the user to input an operation of erasing thecertain device control screen 502, and switching can be performedbetween the device control screens 502 with one touch operation.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing screen transition between the display stateof the basic screen and the display state of the device control screen502 performed in the case where the basic screen includes a plurality ofdevice icons 501 representing the devices 200 of the same type. As shownin the left diagram of FIG. 27, the basic screen includes two deviceicons 501 for the television set. Here, the device icon 501 for atelevision set A is represented as a device icon 2401, and the deviceicon 501 for a television set B is represented as a device icon 2402. Atthis time, the user can intuitively select a television set that isdesired to be controlled from the floor plan 500, and operate thetelevision set.

For example, in the right diagram of FIG. 27, the device icon 2401 forthe television set A is selected, and a device control screen 2403 forthe television set A is displayed. Consequently, even if there are aplurality of device icons 501 for the devices 200 of the same type, eachdevice icon 501 is disposed at a position on the floor plan 500corresponding to the actual installation position. This allows the userto intuitively select the device icon 501 for a device 200 that isdesired to be controlled in accordance with the display position on thefloor plan 500, which prevents the device control screen 502 for anotherdevice 200 from being erroneously displayed.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing screen transition performed in the casewhere different device icons 501 are successively selected in thedisplay state of the device control screen 502 to successively switchbetween the device control screens 502. In the upper left diagram, adevice control screen 2511 for the air conditioner is displayed. Whenthe device icon 2501 for the refrigerator is selected in this state, adevice control screen 2512 for the refrigerator is displayed on thedisplay 101 as shown in the upper right diagram. When the device icon2502 for the washing machine is selected in the upper left diagram, adevice control screen 2513 for the washing machine is displayed as shownin the lower right diagram. When the device icon 2503 for the airpurifier is selected in the upper left diagram, a device control screen2514 for the air purifier is displayed as shown in the lower leftdiagram. Such screen transition is performed in the same manner in theupper right diagram, the lower right diagram, and the lower leftdiagram.

Consequently, when the user selects the device icon 501 in the displaystate of the device control screen 502, the device control screen 502corresponding to the device icon 501 can be directly displayed.Therefore, in the case where another device control screen 502 is to bedisplayed while a certain device control screen 502 is displayed, theother device control screen 502 can be displayed with one touchoperation without inputting an operation of erasing the device controlscreen 502 being displayed. This allows the user to smoothly switchbetween the device control screens 502.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of display on the basic screenof the device icons 501 for incommunicable devices 200 that cannot bedetected on the network. The device management section 105 detects adevice 200 that cannot be detected on the network and a device 200 thatdoes not respond to a control command even though registered in thedevice list 3100 as incommunicable devices 200. Then, the displaycontrol section 103 displays the device icons 501 for the incommunicabledevices 200 in a display mode that is different from that for the deviceicons 501 for communicable devices 200.

For example, in FIG. 29, the device icons 501 for the incommunicabledevices 200 are represented as device icons 2601. The device icons 2601are displayed translucently. This allows the user to immediatelyrecognize that the devices 200 indicated by the device icons 2601 arecurrently out of order or cannot be controlled because of occurrence ofa communication failure.

Although the device icons 2601 are displayed translucently in FIG. 29,the present disclosure is not limited thereto. For example, the deviceicons 2601 may be displayed in a fainter color or more darkly than theother device icons 501, or provided with an annotation mark.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the configuration of home information 2700.The home information 2700 is managed by the server 300 for each house,and the home controller 100 controls display on the basic screen, thedevice control screen 502, and so forth on the basis of the homeinformation 2700. As shown in FIG. 30, the home information 2700includes the floor plan 500, vertex information 2800, the roominformation 2900, and a device list 4700 managed by the server.

As shown in FIG. 6, the floor plan 500 is a plan view that is preparedfor each floor of a house and that planarly represents the arrangementand the shape of one or more rooms forming the floor. In the presentdisclosure, the floor plan 500 includes a plan view formed from imagedata represented in a bitmap format, for example.

The vertex information 2800 is information for adapting the floor plan500 to a two-dimensional coordinate-axis space to allow the homecontroller 100 to interpret the floor plan 500. The room information2900) is information for deciding the regions of rooms from the vertexinformation 2800. The vertex information 2800, the room information2900, and the device list 4700 managed by the server will be describedin detail below.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing the configuration of the vertex information2800. As shown in FIG. 31, the vertex information 2800 includes a vertexID 2801 and a vertex coordinate 2802. The vertex ID 2801 is anidentifier that identifies a vertex on the floor plan 500. The vertexcoordinate 2802 is a coordinate represented in the format of (Xcoordinate, Y coordinate, floor number), and indicates the position of avertex of a partition line or the like represented on the floor plan500. For example, the vertex with a vertex ID of B has a vertexcoordinate (X20, Y0, Z1), which represents the position on the firstfloor (the ground floor) with an X coordinate of 20 and a Y coordinateof 0.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the correlation between each vertexregistered in the vertex information 2800 and the floor plan 500. Itshould be noted, however, that in FIG. 33, the upper left vertex of thefloor plan 500 is the origin (with an X coordinate of 0 and a Ycoordinate of 0). For example, the vertex with a vertex ID of A has avertex coordinate (X0, Y0, Z1), and therefore is positioned at theorigin. Meanwhile, the vertex with a vertex ID of B has a vertexcoordinate (X20, Y0, Z1), and therefore is positioned at the upper rightvertex of the bath.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing the configuration of the room information2900. As shown in FIG. 32, the room information 2900 includes a room ID2901, the room type 2902, and a room coordinate 2903. The room ID 2901is an identifier that identifies a room on the floor plan 500. The roomtype 2902 indicates the type of the room. The room coordinate 2903 isexpressed by a set of the vertex IDs 2801, and decides the region of theroom on the floor plan 500. For example, the room with a room ID of C isthe bath, and indicates a region formed by connecting the vertexes withvertex IDs of A. B. G and F sequentially in this order on the floor plan500. The room information 2900 includes not only information on therooms but also information on the staircase. The region with a room IDof D formed by connecting the vertexes with vertex IDs of H, I, R, and Qsequentially in this order represents the staircase.

Consequently, with the vertex information 2800 and the room information2900 provided, the home controller 100 can specify the regions of therooms represented on the floor plan 500 by plotting the vertexesindicated by the vertex information 2800 on the image data for the floorplan 500 and connecting the vertexes indicated by the room coordinate2903, and recognize the type of the rooms from the room type 2902.

The vertex information 2800 may be generated by a system administratorby causing the floor plan 500 to be displayed on a display of a personalcomputer, detecting vertexes from the displayed floor plan, andinputting the vertex ID and the vertex coordinate of the detectedvertexes to the personal computer. The vertex information 2900 may alsobe generated by the system administrator by detecting rooms from thefloor plan displayed on a display, and inputting the room ID, the roomtype, and the room coordinate of the detected rooms to a personalcomputer. Alternatively, the vertex information 2800 and the roominformation 2900 may be generated by taking in CAD data which are theoriginal data for the floor plan 500.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the configuration of the device list 4700managed by the server 300. As shown in FIG. 34, the device list 4700includes a device ID 4701, a device type 4702, a model number 4703, anarrangement 4704, a capability information 4705, and a control commandtransmission destination 4706.

The device ID 4701 is the identifier of the device 200. The device type4702 indicates the type of the device 200. The model number 4703indicates the model number of the device 200. The arrangement 4704 is acoordinate represented in the format of (X coordinate, Y coordinate,floor number) as with the vertex coordinate 2802, and indicates thearrangement of the device icon 501 corresponding to the device 200 onthe floor plan 500.

The display control section 103 can dispose the device icon 501 on thefloor plan 500 on the basis of the arrangement 4704, and display thebasic screen and so forth. The capability information 4705 indicates thecontent for control of the device 200 and the state that can be acquiredfrom the device 200. For example, the air conditioner with a device IDof A can be controlled for the temperature, the air flow direction, andthe air flow amount. The control command transmission destination 4706indicates the transmission destination of a control command forcontrolling the device 200. For example, the control commandtransmission destination 4706 for the air conditioner with a device IDof A is the device, and therefore a control command is directlytransmitted from the home controller 100 to the device 200. Meanwhile,the control command transmission destination 4706 for the refrigeratorwith a device ID of C is the server, and therefore a control command istransmitted from the home controller 100 to the device 200 via theserver 300. The control command is a command for operating the device200 or confirming the state of the device 200.

The current state of the device 200 may be registered in the device list4700. This allows the server 300 to notify the home controller 100 ofthe state of the relevant device 200 in the case where a request forconfirmation of the state of the device 200 is made from the homecontroller 100.

As discussed above, in order to dispose the device icon 501 on the floorplan 500 on the basis of the actual arrangement of the device 200 withinthe house, the user moves the device icon 501 to an appropriate positionon the floor plan 500. Thus, for the device icon 501 of which thearrangement on the floor plan 500 is not specified by the user, a valuethat indicates an unset arrangement such as (0, 0, 0) is set as thevalue of the arrangement 4704. The display control section 103 displaysthe device icon 501 with the arrangement 4704 unset at a position on thedisplay 101 determined in advance.

The device list 4700 managed by the server may be omitted from the homeinformation 2700. In this case, the home controller 100 may directlyacquire from the device 200 information corresponding to the device type4702, the model number 4703, and the capability information 4705provided in the device list 4700 managed by the server.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the configuration of the device list 3100managed by the home controller 100. The home controller 100 disposes thedevice icons 501 on the floor plan 500 in the basic screen and controlsthe devices 200 on the basis of information in the device list 3100.

The device list 3100 includes the device ID 3101, the device type 3102,a model number 3103, the arrangement 3104, capability information 3105,a control command transmission destination 3106, and an IP address 3107.The device ID 3101 to the control command transmission destination 3106are the same in content as those with the same name in FIG. 34.

In the device list 3100, the content of the device type 3102, the modelnumber 3103, the arrangement 3104, the capability information 3105, thecontrol command transmission destination 3106 can be acquired by thedevice management section 105 by transmitting the device list 4700 fromthe server 300. The IP address 3107 is acquired from the device 200 bythe device management section 105. It should be noted, however, that thedevice management section 105 may give priority to the content of thedevice type 3102, the model number 3103, the capability information3105, and the control command transmission destination 3106 that can bedirectly acquired from the device 200 in the case where such content isavailable.

The control command transmission destination 3106 may be determined inadvance by the home controller system, may be automatically decided onthe basis of the state of the network to which the home controller 100is connected, or may be set by the user, rather than being acquired fromthe server 300 or the device 200.

Next, the flow of control performed on the device 200 by the homecontroller 100 will be described using the drawings.

FIG. 36 is a sequence diagram showing the flow of a process for the homecontroller 100 to acquire the home information 2700 from the server 300.The home controller 100 acquires the home information 2700 from theserver 300 at desired timing such as when the home controller 100 isinitially utilized or started, and generates the basic screen shown inFIG. 5 on the basis of the acquired home information 2700.

First, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100transmits a home information request to the server 300 (S3201). Here,the home information request includes at least a home controller ID thatindicates a user or a home that utilizes the home controller 100. Thehome information management section 301 of the server 300 which receivesthe home information request searches the storage section 304 for thehome information 2700 corresponding to the home controller ID (S3202),and transmits the home information 2700 to the home controller 100(S3203). The device management section 105 of the home controller 100stores the home information 2700 received from the server 300 in thestorage section 104, and the display control section 103 generates abasic screen on the basis of the home information 2700, and displays thebasic screen on the display 101 (S3204).

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to detect thedevice 200 on the network after the home controller 100 is connected tothe network will be described using FIG. 37.

In FIG. 37, a device A 200 with a device ID of A and a device B 200 of adevice ID of B shown in FIG. 34 are connected to the network.

When the home controller 100 is connected to the network when the homecontroller 100 is initially utilized or turned on (S3301), the devicemanagement section 105 of the home controller 100 broadcasts a devicesearch request to all the devices 200 on the network (S3302). The deviceA 200 which receives the device search request returns a device searchresponse to the home controller 100 (S3303). The home controller 100which receives the device search response acquires device informationfrom the device A 200 (S3304), and updates the display screen (S3305).

Similarly, the device B 200 which receives the device search requestreturns a device search response to the home controller 100 (S3306). Thehome controller 100 which receives the device search response acquiresdevice information from the device B 200 (S3307), and updates thedisplay screen (S3308). Here, the device information is information thatrepresents the device type, the model number, the capabilityinformation, and so forth of the device 200. The device managementsection 105 of the home controller 100 generates the device list 3100(see FIG. 35) on the basis of the device information.

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to detect thedevice 200 on the network when the device 200 is connected to thenetwork will be described using FIG. 38. When the device A 200 isconnected to the network when the device A 200 is initially utilized orturned on (S3401), a network connection notification is broadcast to allthe home controllers 100 on the network (S3402). In the home controller100 which receives the network connection notification, the devicemanagement section 105 acquires device information from the device A 200(S3403), and the display control section 103 updates the display screen(S3404). When the device B 200 is connected to the network, the sameprocess as for the device A 200 is performed (S3405 to S3408).

Here, the update of the display screen of the home controller 100 inFIGS. 37 and 38 (S3305, S3308, S3404, and S3408) will be described. Thehome controller 100 hides the device icon 501 corresponding to thedevice 200 until the device search response or the network connectionnotification is received from the device 200, that is, until the device200 is detected on the network. Then, the home controller 100 whichreceives the device search response displays the device icon 501 for thecorresponding device 200 on the screen. Alternatively, the homecontroller 100 displays the device icon 501 for the undetected device200 in a faint color (for example, translucently) compared to the deviceicon 501 for the detected device 200. Then, the home controller 100which receives the device search response changes the color of thedevice icon 501 for the undetected device 200 to the same color as thecolor of the device icon 501 for the detected device 200.

FIGS. 39A and 39B are each a flowchart showing the flow of a process forthe home controller 100 to control the device 200 according to thepresent disclosure.

First, the touch panel control section 102 senses that the device icon501 representing a certain device 200 is selected by the user on thebasic screen (S3501). Next, the display control section 103 retracts allthe device icons 501 out of the display region of the device controlscreen 502 (S3502). In this case, the device icons 501 are retracted asshown in FIGS. 11 and 13.

Next, the display control section 103 adjusts the display positions ofthe retracted device icons 501 (S3503). For example, the selected deviceicons 501 are adjusted so as to be displayed at particular positions asshown in FIGS. 12 and 14.

Next, the display control section 103 judges whether the device controlscreen 502 corresponding to the device icon 501 selected by the user isa dedicated screen or a floor plan (S3504).

Here, the device control screen 502 which is a dedicated screen refersto the device control screen 502 prepared separately from the floor planand displayed as overlapped on the floor plan as shown in FIG. 13. Onthe other hand, the device control screen 502 which is a floor planrefers to the device control screen 502 which is the floor plan itself.

For example, if the illumination device can be turned on and off oradjusted for the brightness by the user by directly tapping on theregion of a room on the floor plan in which the illumination device isdisposed, the illumination device can be operated with presence. In thecase where the user attempts to operate a plurality of illuminationdevices installed in the living room at the same time, meanwhile, theentire screen is covered by the device control screens 502 dedicated tothe illumination devices if the device control screens 502 dedicated tothe individual illumination devices are displayed on the floor plan atthe same time, which lowers the viewability.

Thus, in the following description, it is assumed that the devicecontrol screen 502 for the illumination device is a floor plan.Specifically, when the user selects the device icon 501 for theillumination device installed in a certain room in the basic screen, allthe device icons 501 are retracted out of the display region of thefloor plan, and the floor plan becomes ready to receive an operation forthe illumination device in the room. Then, when the user taps on theregion of the room on the floor plan in which the selected illuminationdevice is installed, one or more illumination devices within the roomcan be operated at the same time.

For example, when the user taps on the region of a room with theillumination devices in the room turned off, one or more illuminationdevices in the room are turned on at the same time. Next, when the usertaps on the region, the one or more illumination devices are turned offat the same time.

In the case where the device control screen 502 is a floor plan inS3504, and if the region of the room in which the device icon 501 isdisposed is equal to or less than a certain size (YES in S3506), thedisplay control section 103 causes the device control screen 502dedicated to the device in which the region of the room is displayed asenlarged to be displayed as overlapped on the floor plan (S3507). Here,for example, a floor plan formed by clipping the floor plan of therelevant room from the floor plan for the entire floor and enlarging theclipped floor plan is displayed as overlapped on the floor plan for theentire floor.

If the region of the room in which the device icon 501 is disposed isnot equal to or less than the certain size (NO in S3506), on the otherhand, the display control section 103 displays the floor plan as thedevice control screen 502 (S3508).

Information as to whether a dedicated screen or a floor plan is adoptedas the device control screen 502 for each device 200 is stored inadvance in the storage section 104. Thus, the display control section103 may reference the information to determine whether the devicecontrol screen 502 is a dedicated screen or a floor plan.

In addition, the display control section 103 may calculate the size ofthe relevant room by specifying the vertexes of the relevant room fromthe room information 2900, specifying the coordinates of the specifiedvertexes from the vertex information 2800, and calculating the area of aregion surrounded by the specified coordinates of the vertexes. Then,the result of determination in S3506 may be NO if the size of the roomis not equal to or less than the certain size determined in advance, andthe result of determination in S3506 may be YES if the size of the roomis equal to or less than the certain size.

In the case where the device control screen 502 is a dedicated screen inS3504, on the other hand, the display control section 103 displays thededicated screen as overlapped on the floor plan (S3505).

In S3509, the touch panel control section 102 senses that a contactingobject (here, a finger of the user) starts contacting the display 101.

Next, the touch panel control section 102 determines whether or not thecontact target is the device icon 501 (S3510).

If it is determined that the device icon 501 is contacted (YES inS3510), the touch panel control section 102 determines whether or notthe contacting object contacts the same device icon 501 as the deviceicon 501 selected in S3501 (S3511). In the case where it is determinedthat the contacting object contacts the same device icon 501 as thedevice icon 501 selected in S3501 (YES in S3511), the display controlsection 103 hides the device control screen 502 being displayed todisplay the basic screen (S3514).

In the case where the touch panel control section 102 determines thatthe device icon 501 is not contacted (NO in S3510), the touch panelcontrol section 102 further determines whether or not the contact targetis the device control screen 502 (S3512). In the case where it isdetermined that the contact target is not the device control screen 502(NO in S3512), the display control section 103 hides the device controlscreen 502 being displayed, and the basic screen is displayed (S3514).

If the touch panel control section 102 determines that the contactingobject contacts a button or the like within the device control screen502 (YES in S3512), on the other hand, the process is advanced to S3513,where a control flow that is specific to the device is executed (S3513).

Next, the control flow that is specific to the device executed in S3513will be described in detail using FIG. 40. First, the device controlsection 106 decides the content of control that is specific to thedevice in accordance with the content of a contact by the contactingobject (S3601). Next, the device control section 106 generates a controlcommand according to the content of control (S3602). It is assumed thatthe user taps on the button for raising the temperature with the devicecontrol screen 502 for the air conditioner displayed as shown in FIG. 11and the touch panel control section 102 senses the tap. Then, the devicecontrol section 106 generates a control command for raising thetemperature of the air conditioner. Next, the device control section 106advances the process to S3603, where a control command transmission flowis executed.

Next, the control command transmission flow executed in S3603 will bedescribed in detail using FIG. 41. First, the device control section 106determines whether or not the home controller 100 is connected to thehome network (S3701). If the home controller 100 is connected to thehome controller (YES in S3701), the device control section 106 checksthe transmission destination of a control command in accordance with thecontent of the control command transmission destination 3106 of thedevice list 3100 (S3702). Here, the home network is a network providedwithin the home of the user. Thus, the result of determination in S3701is NO if the user operates the home controller 100 from a location awayfrom the home, and the result of determination in S3701 is YES if theuser operates the home controller 100 from a location within the home.

If the transmission destination of a control command is “DEVICE” inS3702, the device control section 106 transmits a control command to therelevant device 200 (S3703). If the transmission destination of acontrol command is “SERVER” in S3702, on the other hand, the devicecontrol section 106 transmits a control command to the server 300(S3704).

For example, in the device list 3100, the control command transmissiondestination 3106 of the air conditioner is “DEVICE”, and therefore thedevice control section 106 transmits a control command to the airconditioner. On the other hand, in the device list 3100, the controlcommand transmission destination 3106 of the refrigerator is “SERVER”,and therefore the device control section 106 transmits a control commandto the server 300.

1 Meanwhile, in the case where it is judged in S3701 that the homecontroller 100 is not connected to the home network (NO in S3701), theprocess in S3704 is performed.

In S3705, the device control section 106 receives the control resultfrom the device 200. Next, in the case where transmission of a controlcommand to all the devices 200 that are operated at the same time iscompleted (YES in S3706), the device control section 106 advances theprocess to S3707. In the case where transmission of a control command toall the devices 200 that are operated at the same time is not completed(NO in S3706), on the other hand, the device control section 106 returnsthe process to S3702, and repeats the processes in and after S3702.

For example, in the case where two illumination devices are installed inthe same room and the two illumination devices are set in advance to beoperated at the same time, the device control section 106 transmits acontrol command to each of the two illumination devices. The result ofdetermination in S3706 is NO for devices 200 that are not operated atthe same time as other devices 200.

Next, the display control section 103 updates the screen displayed onthe display 101 (S3707). For example, if the set temperature of the airconditioner is changed, the device control screen 502 is updated suchthat the temperature display is flashed on and off, for example, untilthe set temperature of the air conditioner is changed by a controlcommand and the temperature display stops flashing when the settemperature of the air conditioner is changed by a control command. Inthe example of the illumination device, the screen is updated such thatthe region on the floor plan of a room in which the illumination deviceis installed becomes brighter than other regions in the case where theillumination device is turned on.

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to directlycontrol the device 200 will be described using FIG. 42. First, the touchpanel control section 102 of the home controller 100 senses a useroperation on the device control screen 502 (S3801). Next, the devicecontrol section 106 of the home controller 100 generates a controlcommand according to the user operation, and transmits the controlcommand to the device 200 (S3802).

The device 200 which receives the control command executes the controlcommand (S3803), and transmits the control result to the home controller100 (S3804). The display control section 103 of the home controller 100which receives the control result updates the display screen inaccordance with the control result (S3805).

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to control thedevice 200 by way of the server 300 will be described using FIG. 43.First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100senses a user operation on the device control screen 502 (S3901). Next,the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates acontrol command according to the user operation, and transmits thecontrol command to the server 300 (S3902).

The server 300 which receives the control command transmits the relevantcontrol command to the device 200 (S3903). The device 200 which receivesthe control command executes the control command (S3904), and transmitsthe control result to the server 300 (S3905). The server 300 whichreceives the control result transmits the control result to the homecontroller 100 (S3906). The display control section 103 of the homecontroller 100 which receives the control result updates the displayscreen in accordance with the control result (S3907).

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to confirm thedevice state of the device 200 by way of the server 300 will bedescribed using FIG. 44. First, the device 200 transmits the currentdevice state to the server 300 (S4001). Here, the device 200 transmitsthe device state to the server 300 when the device 200 is turned on,when the device 200 is turned off, when the device state is changed, orregularly to cause the server 300 to store the device state. The processin S4001 may be executed asynchronously with the processes in S4002 toS4006.

Next, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100senses a user operation on the device control screen 502 (S4002). Next,the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates acontrol command according to the user operation, and transmits thecontrol command to the server 300 (S4003). Here, a control command forconfirming the device state of the device 200 is generated.

The server 300 which receives the control command searches for thecurrent device state of the relevant device 200 (S4004), and transmitsthe device state of the relevant device 200 to the home controller 100as the control result (S4005). The display control section 103 of thehome controller 100 which receives the control result updates thedisplay screen in accordance with the control result (S4006). Forexample, if the device control screen 502 for the device 200 isdisplayed on the display 101, the content of the device control screen502 for the device 200 is updated in accordance with the control result.

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to directlycontrol the devices 200 in the case where the home controller 100controls a plurality of devices 200 with one operation will be describedusing FIG. 45. Here, a case where the home controller 100 controls thedevice A 200 and the device B 200 is described as an example.

First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100senses a user operation on the device control screen 502 (S4101). Next,the device control section 106 of the home controller 100 generates acontrol command according to the user operation, and transmits thecontrol command to the device A 200 (S4102).

The device A 200 which receives the control command executes the controlcommand (S4103), and transmits the control result to the home controller100 (S4104).

Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100transmits to the device B 200 a control command that is the same as thecontrol command transmitted to the device A 200 (S4105). The device B200 which receives the control command executes the control command(S4106), and transmits the control result to the home controller 100(S4107).

The display control section 103 of the home controller 100 whichreceives the control result updates the display screen in accordancewith the control result (S4108). In this case, for example, if thedevice control screens 502 for the devices A 200 and B 200 are displayedon the display 101, the content of the device control screens 502 forthe devices A 200 and B 200 is updated in accordance with the controlresult.

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to control thedevices 200 by way of the server 300 in the case where the homecontroller 100 controls a plurality of devices 200 with one operationwill be described using FIG. 46. Here, a case where the home controller100 controls the device A 200 and the device B 200 is described as anexample. In addition, it is assumed that the devices A 200 and B 200 arerepresented by one device icon 501, and controlled using one devicecontrol screen 502.

First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100senses a user operation on the device control screen 502 (S4201).

Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100generates a control command for the device A 200 according to the useroperation, and transmits the control command to the server 300 (S4202).

The server 300 which receives the control command for the device A 200transmits the control command to the device A 200 (S4203). The device A200 which receives the control command executes the control command(S4204), and transmits the control result to the server 300 (S4205). Theserver 300 which receives the control result transmits the controlresult to the home controller 100 (S4206).

Similarly, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100generates a control command for the device B 200 according to the useroperation, and transmits the control command to the server 300 (S4207).

The server 300 which receives the control command transmits the controlcommand to the device B 200 (S4208). The device B 200 which receives thecontrol command executes the control command (S4209), and transmits thecontrol result to the server 300 (S4210). The server 300 which receivesthe control result transmits the control result to the home controller100 (S4211).

Then, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100 updatesthe display screen in accordance with the control result (S4212).

Next, the flow of a process for the home controller 100 to control thedevices 200 by way of the server 300 in the case where the homecontroller 100 controls a plurality of devices 200 with one operationwill be described using FIG. 47. Here, a case where the home controller100 controls the device A 200 and the device B 200 is described as anexample. In addition, it is assumed that the devices A 200 and B 200 arerepresented by one device icon 501, and controlled using one devicecontrol screen 502.

First, the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller 100senses a user operation on the device control screen 502 (S4301).

Next, the device control section 106 of the home controller 100generates a control command for the device A 200 and the device B 200 inaccordance with the user operation, and transmits the control command tothe server 300 (S4302).

The server 300 which receives the control command transmits the controlcommand to the device A 200 (S4303). The device A 200 which receives thecontrol command executes the control command (S4304), and transmits thecontrol result to the server 300 (S4305).

Similarly, the server 300 transmits the control command to the device B200 (S4306). The device B 200 which receives the control commandexecutes the control command (S4307), and transmits the control resultto the server 300 (54308). The server 300 which receives the controlresult for the device A 200 and the device B 200 transmits the controlresult to the home controller 100 (S4309).

Then, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100 updatesthe display screen in accordance with the control result (S4310).

Next, the flow of a process for a case where the device icon 501 ismoved in the home controller 100 will be described using FIG. 48. Here,it is assumed that the user owns two home controllers A 100 and B 100.

When the touch panel control section 102 of the home controller A 100senses movement of the device icon 501 (S4801), the display controlsection 103 updates the display screen (S4802). Here, the displaycontrol section 103 displays the device icon 501 moved in accordancewith the amount of a drag performed on the device icon 501 by the user.

The device management section 105 of the home controller A 100 transmitsto the server 300 a device list update notification including thecoordinate on the floor plan 500 after the drag (S4803). Here, thedevice management section 105 of the home controller A 100 updates thecontent of the arrangement 3104 of the relevant device 200 in the devicelist 3100 managed by the device management section 105 itself with thecoordinate after the drag.

The server 300 which receives the device list update notificationupdates the device list 4700 (S4804). In this case, the home informationmanagement section 301 of the server 300 updates the content of thearrangement 4704 of the relevant device 200 in the device list 4700 withthe coordinate included in the device list update notification.

Subsequently, the server 300 transmits the device list updatenotification to the home controller B 100 (S4805). The home controller B100 which receives the device list update notification updates thedisplay screen (S4806). Here, the device management section 105 of thehome controller B 100 updates the content of the arrangement 3104 of therelevant device 200 in the device list 3100 managed by the devicemanagement section 105 itself with the coordinate included in the devicelist update notification.

The device icon 501 is disposed at an appropriate position on the floorplan 500 through the process described above. Because the homecontroller B 100 is notified of the update of the arrangement positionof the device icon 501 performed by the home controller A 100 by way ofthe server 300, the arrangement position of the device icon 501 afterthe update is shared among the home controllers A 100 and B 100 and theserver 300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid trouble in which thearrangement position of the device icon 501 is different between thehome controller A 100 and the home controller B 100.

Next, an example of a process for updating the device lists of the homecontroller 100 and the server 300 will be described using FIG. 49. Thedevice 200 transmits the device state indicating the current state ofthe device 200 itself to the server 300 (S4901). Here, the device 200may regularly transmit the device state, or may transmit the devicestate when the state is varied. The server 300 updates the device list4700 in accordance with the content of the received device state(S4902). Here, in the case where the device list 4700 does not containinformation on the device 200, the server 300 adds information on thedevice 200 as a new device. Then, the server 300 transmits a device listupdate notification to the home controller 100 (S4903). The devicemanagement section 105 of the home controller 100 updates the devicelist 3100 in accordance with the content of the received device listupdate notification (S4904). Here, in the case where the device list3100 does not contain information on the device 200, the devicemanagement section 105 adds information on the device 200 as a newdevice. Then, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100updates the display screen (S4905).

Consequently, the server 300 is notified of variation in state of thedevice 200, which allows the server 300 to monitor variation in state ofthe device 200. The server 300 to which the device state is transmittedfrom the device 200 notifies the home controller 100 of variation instate of the device 200, which allows the home controller 100 torecognize the current state of the device 200. In the case where a newdevice 200 is connected to the home network, the server 300 and the homecontroller 100 can add the new device. Hence, it is possible to preventoccurrence of deviation between the actual state of the device 200 andthe state of the device 200 recognized by the home controller 100.

Next, another example of the process for updating the device lists ofthe home controller 100 and the server 300 will be described using FIG.50. The device 200 transmits the device state to the home controller 100(S5001). Here, the device 200 may regularly transmit the device state,or may transmit the device state when the state is varied.

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 updates thedevice list 3100 in accordance with the content of the received devicestate (S5002). Here, in the case where the device list 3100 does notcontain information on the device 200, the device management section 105adds information on the device 200 as a new device. Then, the displaycontrol section 103 updates the display screen (S5003). Then, the devicemanagement section 105 of the home controller 100 transmits a devicelist update notification to the server 300 (S5004). The server 300updates the device list 4700 in accordance with the received device listupdate notification (S5005). Here, in the case where the device list4700 does not contain information on the device 200, the server 300 addsinformation on the device 200 as a new device.

Next, still another example of a process in which the home controller100 and the server 300 update the device list will be described usingFIG. 51. In FIG. 51, a case where the user owns two home controllers100, namely an in-home home controller 100 and an out-home homecontroller 100, is described as an example. Here, the out-home homecontroller 100 is a home controller 100 taken away from the home by theuser, and the in-home home controller 100 is a home controller 100 keptat the home by the user.

The device 200 transmits the device state to the in-home home controller100 (S5101). The in-home home controller 100 updates the device list3100 in accordance with the content of the received device state(S5102). Here, in the case where the device list 3100 does not containinformation on the device 200, the device management section 105 addsinformation on the device 200 as a new device. Then, the display screenis updated (S5103). Then, the in-home home controller 100 transmits adevice list update notification to the server 300 (S5104).

The server 300 updates the device list 4700 in accordance with thecontent of the received device list update notification (S5105). Here,in the case where the device list 4700 does not contain information onthe device 200, the server 300 adds information on the device 200 as anew device. Then, the server 300 transmits a device list updatenotification to the out-home home controller 100 (S5106). The out-homehome controller 100 updates the device list 3100 in accordance with thecontent of the received device list update notification (S5107). Here,in the case where the device list 3100 does not contain information onthe device 200, the device management section 105 of the out-home homecontroller 100 adds information on the device 200 as a new device. Then,the display screen is updated (S5108).

According to the example, even in the case where one home controller 100is located away from the home and the other home controller 100 islocated in the home, it is possible to prevent occurrence of deviationbetween the states of the device 200 recognized by the two homecontrollers 100.

The sequences and the process flows described above are merelyexemplary, and the order of the steps may be changed and some of thesteps may be omitted as long as the intended process may be embodied.For example, a control command may be transmitted to the device A 200and the device B 200 asynchronously.

In the foregoing description, a plan view that planarly represents theposition and the shape of rooms forming each floor is adopted as thefloor plan 500. However, the present disclosure is not limited thereto,and a diagram that schematically shows how many rooms of what type arelocated on each floor may be adopted as the floor plan.

Floor plans in other patterns will be specifically described below. FIG.52 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5200 in another pattern. In thefloor plan 5200, rooms forming one floor are each represented by onerectangular block, and the rooms on the one floor are disposed in amatrix. The blocks have the same size, and are each provided with thename of the room.

In the floor plan 5200, the name and the number of the rooms formingeach floor are indicated, but the relative size and the position in thefloor of the rooms are not represented. In the present disclosure, sucha diagram is treated as the floor plan 5200. That is, in the presentdisclosure, any diagram that represents at least what rooms are providedon each floor are treated as the floor plan.

For example, it is seen that a floor plan 5201 for the first floorincludes rooms such as a living room, a kitchen, a dining room, a bath,a lavatory, a toilet, a staircase, and a hallway. Meanwhile, it is seenthat a floor plan 5202 for the second floor includes rooms such as amain bedroom, a bedroom 1, a bedroom 2, a child's room, and a staircase.

The user can drag and move a desired room on the floor plan 5200 tochange the position of the room on the floor plan 5200. In the casewhere a large number of devices 200 are disposed within a room and allthe device icons 501 cannot be displayed within the room on the floorplan 5200 using a default room size, the display control section 103 mayincrease the size of the room such that all the device icons 501 can beaccommodated within the room.

FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen thatadopts the floor plan 5200. The floor plan 5200 is displayed on thebasic screen. In addition, the device icons 501 for the devices 200actually disposed are displayed within each room.

For example, the device icons 501 for the television set and theillumination device are displayed in the living room, and therefore itis seen that the television set and the illumination device areinstalled in the living room.

The device list display change button 503 is a button for switching thescreen display from the basic screen to the device list display screendiscussed earlier (see FIG. 24).

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the display state of the device controlscreen 502 for a case where the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 isadopted. In the basic screen shown in FIG. 53, when the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses that the user selects the device icon 501,the display control section 103 causes the display 101 to display thedevice control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501.In FIG. 54, the device icon 501 for the air conditioner is selected, andtherefore the device control screen 502 for the air conditioner isdisplayed as overlapped on the floor plan 5200.

In displaying the device control screen 502, the display control section103 disposes the device icons 501 displayed on the floor plan 5200outside the display region of the device control screen 502. In theexample of FIG. 54, all the device icons 501 are disposed in onevertical line on the left side of the floor plan 5200.

In disposing the device icons 501 in one vertical line on the left sideof the floor plan 5200, the display control section 103 may group thedevice icons 501 under particular conditions. For example, the deviceicons 501 may be grouped in accordance with the room, may be grouped inaccordance with the type of the device 200, or may be grouped inaccordance with the category based on the type of the device 200.

In the example of FIG. 54, the device icons 501 are disposed on the leftside of the floor plan 5200. However, the device icons 501 may bedisposed in one vertical line on the right side of the floor plan 5200,or may be disposed in one horizontal line on the upper or lower side ofthe floor plan 5200.

In the case where all the device icons 501 cannot be displayed on theleft side of the floor plan 5200, the display control section 103 mayscroll the device icons 501 upward or downward in accordance with aswipe operation performed upward or downward on the device icons 501disposed in one line on the left side to cause the device icons 501,which have been hidden, to be displayed within the display 101.

In disposing the device icons 501 in one vertical line on the left sideof the floor plan 5200, the display control section 103 may display thedevice icon 501 selected by the user in a display mode that is differentfrom that for the unselected device icons 501. For example, the selecteddevice icon 501 may be displayed in a color that is different from thatof the unselected device icons 501, may be displayed more brightly thanthe unselected device icons 501, may be displayed more densely than theunselected device icons 501, or may be flashed on and off at a constantcycle.

The display control section 103 may scroll an array of the device icons501 such that the device icon 501 selected by the user is positioned ata conspicuous position (for example, the top, middle, or bottomposition) in the line of icons.

In displaying the device control screen 502, the display control section103 may dispose all the device icons 501 on the outer periphery of anellipse as shown in FIG. 12.

Next, transition between the display state of the basic screen and thedisplay state of the device control screen 502 will be described usingFIG. 55.

In the basic screen shown in the left diagram of FIG. 55, the userselects the device icon 501 for the device 200 (here, the airconditioner) that is desired to be controlled, and the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses the selection. Then, as shown in the rightdiagram of FIG. 55, the display control section 103 displays the devicecontrol screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501 asoverlapped on the floor plan 5200. This results in transition from thedisplay state of the basic screen to the display state of the devicecontrol screen 502.

On the other hand, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 55, in thedisplay state of the device control screen 502, the user selects thedevice icon 501 for the air conditioner corresponding to the devicecontrol screen 502 or a location outside the display region of thedevice control screen 502 (for example, the display region of the floorplan 5200 outside the display region of the device control screen 502),and the touch panel control section 102 senses the selection. Then, asshown in the left diagram of FIG. 55, the display control section 103erases the device control screen 502, and returns from the display stateof the device control screen 502 to the display state of the basicscreen.

FIG. 56 is a diagram showing the configuration of a floor plan 5600 fora case where the size of each block is varied in accordance with theactual room size in the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52.

In the left diagram of FIG. 56, a floor plan 5601 for the first floor isshown. In the right diagram of FIG. 56, a floor plan 5602 for the secondfloor is shown.

In the floor plan 5601 for the first floor, the living room is thelargest in terms of the room size, and is followed by the kitchen, thebath, and the staircase. Therefore, the sizes of the rooms are displayedin this order. Also in the floor plan 5602 for the second floor, therooms are represented in accordance with the actual room size. In thiscase, information that indicates the actual room size may be registeredin advance in room information 6800 to be discussed later, and thedisplay control section 103 may decide the size of each room inaccordance with the information.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen thatadopts the floor plan 5600 shown in FIG. 56. In the floor plan 5600,each room is displayed with a size matching the actual size. Inaddition, the device icons 501 for the devices 200 actually disposed aredisplayed in each room.

In the case where the mode in which each room is represented with a sizematching the actual room size on the floor plan 5600 is adopted,displaying all the rooms within the display 101 may result in smalldisplay of the rooms to make a user operation difficult. Thus, a roomdisplay button 5603 with a text “DISPLAY OTHER ROOMS” is provided inFIG. 57.

When the user selects the room display button and the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses the selection, the display control section103 switches the screen display to the floor plan 5600 which displaysthe remaining rooms.

In the example of FIG. 57, the floor plan 5600 is partitioned into thefloor plan 5601 for the first floor and the floor plan 5602 for thesecond floor. Therefore, when the room display button 5603 is selected,the display control section 103 switches display on the display 101 tothe floor plan 5602 for the second floor. In this case, the room displaybutton 5603 is also provided on the floor plan 5602 for the secondfloor. Therefore, when the room display button 5603 is selected, thedisplay control section 103 switches display on the display 101 to thefloor plan 5601 for the first floor.

Although the floor plan is provided for each floor in the example ofFIG. 57, the present disclosure is not limited thereto. For example, inthe case where the floor plan 5601 for the first floor cannot bedisplayed on the display 101 at the same time, the display controlsection 103 may divide the floor plan 5601 for the first floor, anddisplay a divided portion of the floor plan 5601 on the display 101. Inthis case, when the room display button 5603 is selected, a hiddenportion of the floor plan 5601 for the first floor may be displayed.

In the case where the floor plan 5601 for the first floor and the floorplan 5602 for the second floor can be displayed on the display 101 atthe same time, the display control section 103 may display the floorplan 5601 for the first floor and the floor plan 5602 for the secondfloor on the display 101 at the same time. In this case, the roomdisplay button 5603 is omitted from the floor plan 5600.

In the case where the staircase is tapped on on the floor plan 5600, thedisplay control section 103 may switch between the floor plan 5601 forthe first floor and the floor plan 5602 for the second floor.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the display state of the device controlscreen 502 for a case where the floor plan 5600 shown in FIG. 56 isadopted as the floor plan. In FIG. 58, as in FIG. 54, the device controlscreen 502 for the air conditioner is displayed. FIG. 58 is otherwisethe same as FIG. 54, and therefore is not described.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5900 in still another patternaccording to the present disclosure. The floor plan 5900 of FIG. 59 isthe same as the floor plan 5200 in that rooms are represented by blocksof the same size, but is different from the floor plan 5200 inarrangement of the rooms. Specifically, in the floor plan 5900, thefloor numbers are displayed in the vertical direction, and the roomsforming the same floor are arranged in one horizontal line. In theexample of FIG. 59, the house has three floors, namely the first floorto the third floor, and therefore the rooms forming the third floor aredisposed in the first line, the rooms forming the second floor aredisposed in the second line, and the rooms forming the first floor aredisposed in the third line. The floor number such as 1F. 2F and 3F isindicated at the left end of each line. It is seen at a glance from thefloor plan 5900 on which floor each room is disposed.

Also in the floor plan 5900, the size of each room may be varied inaccordance with the actual room size. In the floor plan 5900, inaddition, in the case where all the rooms cannot be displayed within thedisplay region of the display 101, the floor plan 5900 may be scrolledin the horizontal direction so that a desired room can be displayed onthe display 101.

For example, in the case where there are further rooms on the secondfloor, when the touch panel control section 102 senses that the userperforms a swipe operation from the left to the right, the displaycontrol section 103 may scroll the rooms forming the second floor, orthe rooms forming the first floor to the third floor, from the left tothe right in accordance with the amount of the swipe operation.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen thatadopts the floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 59. The floor plan 5900 isdisplayed on the basic screen. In addition, the device icons 501 for thedevices 200 actually disposed are displayed within each room. The devicelist display change button 503 is a button for switching the screendisplay from the basic screen to the device list display screendiscussed earlier (see FIG. 24).

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the display state of the device controlscreen 502 for a case where the floor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 59 isadopted. In the basic screen shown in FIG. 60, when the touch panelcontrol section 102 senses that the user selects the device icon 501,the display control section 103 causes the display 101 to display thedevice control screen 502 corresponding to the selected device icon 501.In FIG. 61, the device icon 501 for the air conditioner is selected, andtherefore the device control screen 502 for the air conditioner isdisplayed as overlapped on the floor plan 5900. In displaying the devicecontrol screen 502, the display control section 103 disposes the deviceicons 501 displayed on the floor plan 5900 outside the display region ofthe device control screen 502. In the example of FIG. 61, all the deviceicons 501 are disposed in one horizontal line on the lower side of thefloor plan 5900.

In disposing the device icons 501 in one vertical line on the lower sideof the floor plan 5900, the display control section 103 may group thedevice icons 501 under particular conditions. For example, the deviceicons 501 may be grouped in accordance with the room, may be grouped inaccordance with the type of the device 200, or may be grouped inaccordance with the category based on the type of the device 200.

In the example of FIG. 61, the device icons 501 are disposed on thelower side of the floor plan 5900. However, the device icons 501 may bedisposed in one horizontal line on the upper side of the floor plan5900, or may be disposed in one vertical line on the left or right sideof the floor plan 5900.

In the case where all the device icons 501 cannot be disposed on thelower side of the floor plan 500, the display control section 103 mayscroll the device icons 501 leftward or rightward in accordance with aswipe operation performed leftward or rightward on the device icons 501disposed in one horizontal line on the lower side to cause the deviceicons 501, which have been hidden, to be displayed within the display101.

In disposing the device icons 501 in one horizontal line on the lowerside of the floor plan 5900, the display control section 103 may displaythe device icon 501 selected by the user in a display mode that isdifferent from that for the unselected device icons 501. For example,the selected device icon 501 may be displayed in a color that isdifferent from that of the unselected device icons 501, may be displayedmore brightly than the unselected device icons 501, may be displayedmore densely than the unselected device icons 501, or may be flashed onand off at a constant cycle.

The display control section 103 may scroll an array of the device icons501 such that the device icon 501 selected by the user is positioned ata conspicuous position (for example, the leftmost, middle, or rightmostposition) in the line of icons.

In displaying the device control screen 502, the display control section103 may dispose all the device icons 501 on the outer periphery of anellipse as shown in FIG. 12.

In the floor plan 5900, the rooms on all the floors are displayed on thedisplay 101 at the same time, which may result in small display of therooms to make a user operation difficult. Thus, the display controlsection 103 may display the floor plan 5900 as enlarged in accordancewith the user operation. Specifically, when the user performs anoperation of pinching out on a certain room in the floor plan 5900 andthe touch panel control section 102 senses the operation, the displaycontrol section 103 may display the room on the display 101 as enlargedat an enlargement scale matching the amount of the pinch out.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a floor plan that displays a certain roomin the floor plan 5900 as enlarged. As shown in FIG. 62, the displaycontrol section 103 may display a plan view that planarly represents theshape of the relevant room as overlapped on the floor plan 5900.Alternatively, the display control section 103 may switch to displayingthe plan view. This allows the user to grasp the configuration of therooms in the house and the devices 200 disposed in each room on thefloor plan 5900 shown in FIG. 60, and to grasp the actual arrangementposition of the devices 200 in the enlarged room on the floor plan 5900shown in FIG. 62.

In the floor plan 5900 not displayed as enlarged shown in FIG. 60, it isnot necessary for the display control section 103 to display the deviceicons 501 for all the devices 200 disposed within the rooms, and thedisplay control section 103 may display only some of the device icons501.

In this case, the display control section 103 may display one or aplurality of (for example, two) device icons 501 frequently used by theuser on the floor plan 5900. Alternatively, the display control section103 may not display the device icons 501 on the floor plan 5900 notdisplayed as enlarged. This prevents the viewability of the floor plan5900 from being lowered because of an increased number of the deviceicons 501 displayed on the floor plan 5900 not displayed as enlarged.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the display state of the device controlscreen 502 in the floor plan 5900 displayed as enlarged shown in FIG.62. In FIG. 63, as in FIG. 54, the device control screen 502 for the airconditioner is displayed. In FIG. 63, only the device icons 501 disposedin the room (living room) displayed as enlarged are displayed on theleft side of the plan view and in the block of the living room. In theexample of FIG. 62, the device icons 501 for the air conditioner, theillumination device, and the television set are displayed in the livingroom within the plan view, and the device icon 501 for the airconditioner is selected by the user. Therefore, the device icons 501 aredisplayed in one vertical line on the left side of the plan view.

In the case where a certain room is displayed as enlarged, it is highlylikely that the user operates the device 200 disposed within the room.In the case where a certain room is displayed as enlarged, in addition,the device icons 501 for devices in the other rooms are not displayed onthe display 101. Therefore, if the device icons 501 for devices disposedin the other rooms are displayed on the left side of the plan view whenthe user selects a certain device icon 501, the user may be given asense of wrongness.

Thus, in the case where a certain room is displayed as enlarged, thedisplay control section 103 causes only the device icons 501 for thedevices 200 disposed in the room to be displayed in one vertical line onthe left side of the plan view. In the example of FIG. 64, the deviceicons 501 are displayed on the left side of the plan view. However, thedevice icons 501 may be displayed in one vertical line on the right sideof the plan view, or may be displayed in one horizontal line on theupper or lower side of the plan view.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state ofthe basic screen to the display state of the device control screen 502.It is assumed that the user taps on the device icon 501 for the airconditioner, for example, in the basic screen which displays the floorplan 5900 not displayed as enlarged as shown in the upper left diagramof FIG. 64. Then, as shown in the upper right diagram of FIG. 64, thedisplay control section 103 displays the device control screen 502 forthe air conditioner as overlapped on the basic screen. In the screenshown in the upper right diagram of FIG. 64, on the other hand, when theuser taps on a region on the floor plan 5900 other than the devicecontrol screen 502 or taps on the device icon 501 for the airconditioner, the display control section 103 returns the screen displayto the basic screen shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 64.

It is assumed that the user pinches out on the living room in the basicscreen shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 64. Then, as shown in thelower left diagram of FIG. 64, the display control section 103 enlargesthe block of the living room, and at the same time displays the planview of the living room having a size matching the size of the enlargedblock as overlapped on the enlarged block. It is assumed that the userpinches in on the living room in the lower left diagram of FIG. 64.Then, the display control section 103 returns the screen display to thebasic screen shown in the upper left diagram of FIG. 64.

When the device icon 501 for the air conditioner, for example, isselected in the basic screen shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 64,the display control section 103 displays the device control screen 502for the air conditioner as overlapped on the plan view as shown in thelower right diagram of FIG. 64. In the lower right diagram of FIG. 64,when the user taps on a region on the floor plan 5900 other than thedevice control screen 502 or on the device icon 501 for the airconditioner, the display control section 103 returns the screen displayto the screen shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 64.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the configuration of a basic screen 5900which adopts the floor plan shown in FIG. 59 and in which device icons501 are not displayed. In the mode shown in FIG. 65, only rooms formingeach floor are displayed, and the device icons 501 are not displayed.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing screen transition from the display state ofthe basic screen to the display state of the device control screen 502for a case where the basic screen in which device icons 501 are notdisplayed is adopted. It is assumed that the user pinches out on theliving room, for example, in the basic screen shown in the upper leftdiagram of FIG. 66. Then, as shown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 66,the display control section 103 displays the block of the living room asenlarged, and displays the plan view of the living room as overlapped onthe block displayed as enlarged. It is assumed that the user taps on thedevice icon 501 for the air conditioner, for example, in the screenshown in the lower left diagram of FIG. 66. Then, as shown in the lowerright diagram of FIG. 66, the display control section 103 displays thedevice control screen 502 for the air conditioner as overlapped on theplan view of the living room, and disposes the device icons 501 for theliving room in one vertical line on the left side of the plan view ofthe living room. In the lower right diagram of FIG. 66, when the usertaps on a region on the floor plan 5900 and outside the display regionof the device control screen 502, the display control section 103returns the display screen to the screen shown in the lower left diagramof FIG. 66.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the configuration of the home information2700 for a case where the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 is adopted.As shown in FIG. 67, the home information 6400 includes the floor plan5200, the room information 6800, and the device list 4700 managed by theserver. In the floor plan 5200, the display positions of the rooms aredetermined in advance. Therefore, the vertex information 2800 includedin the home information 2700 is omitted from the home information 6400.

The floor plan 5200 is image data obtained by representing the floorplan 5200 shown in FIG. 52 in a bitmap format, for example.Alternatively, the floor plan 5200 may be information that prescribesthe color, the shape, the size, and so forth for displaying the floorplan 5200. The room information 6800 is information for deciding theregions of rooms from the floor plan 5200.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the configuration of room information 6800shown in FIG. 67. As shown in FIG. 68, the room information 6800includes a room ID 6801, a room type 6802, a floor level 6803, and adisplay position 6804. The room ID 6801 is an identifier that identifiesa room on the floor plan 5200. The room type 6802 indicates the type ofthe room. The floor level 6803 indicates the floor level (floor) onwhich the room is disposed. The display position 6804 indicates thearrangement position of the room on the floor plan 5200.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence betweenthe display position 6804 in the room information 6800 and the floorplan 5200. As shown in FIG. 69, the order of the blocks on the floorplan 5200 is prescribed such that the block in the first row and thefirst column corresponds to the first cell, the block in the first rowand the second column corresponds to the second cell, the block in thefirst row and the third column corresponds to the third cell, the blockin the second row and the first column corresponds to the fourth cell,and so forth.

For example, the room with a room ID 6801 of A has a display position6804 of “FIRST CELL ON FIRST FLOOR”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 69, thedisplay control section 103 interprets the block in the first cell (inthe first row and the first column) on the floor plan 5201 for the firstfloor as the living room.

In the example of FIG. 69, the blocks are disposed in three horizontallines, and therefore the cell in the second row and the first columncorresponds to the fourth cell, and the cell in the third row and thefirst column corresponds to the seventh cell. It should be noted,however, that this is merely exemplary. For example, in the case wherethe cells are arranged in four columns in the horizontal direction, thecorrelation between the order of the cells and the arrangement positionsof the blocks is changed as appropriate in accordance with the number ofblocks in the horizontal direction, and the cell in the second row andthe first column corresponds to the fifth cell, and the cell in thethird row and the first column corresponds to the ninth cell.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list 4700managed by the server 300 for a case where the floor plan 5200 shown inFIG. 52 is adopted. It is not necessary for the floor plan 5200 toindicate the arrangement position of the device 200 in the room.Therefore, in the device list 4700 shown in FIG. 70, unlike FIG. 34, theroom type 6802 is registered in the arrangement 4704. The device list4700 shown in FIG. 70 is otherwise the same as the device list 4700shown in FIG. 34. For example, the air conditioner with a device ID 4701of A is disposed in the living room, and therefore “LIVING ROOM” isregistered in the arrangement 4704. In the example of FIG. 70, the roomtype 6802 is adopted as the arrangement 4704. However, any otherinformation that specifies a room may be registered. For example, theroom ID 6801 may be adopted as the arrangement 4704.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the configuration of a device list 3100managed by the home controller 100 for a case where the floor plan 5200shown in FIG. 52 is adopted. Also in the device list 3100 of FIG. 71,for the same reason as that for the device list 4700 of FIG. 70, theroom type 6802 is registered in the arrangement 3104. The device list3100 of FIG. 71 is otherwise the same as the device list 3100 shown inFIG. 35. Also in FIG. 71, the room ID 6801 may be adopted as thearrangement 3104.

Next, the device list 3100 for a case where the plan view of a certainroom is displayed in the case where a pinch-out operation is performedon the room on the basic screen of the floor plan 5900 as shown in FIG.62 will be described. In this case, the room information 6800 shown inFIG. 68 may include an item of the plan view of the room. Then, imagedata for the plan view of the relevant room may be registered in theitem of the plan view of the room. For the plan view of the room, asshown in FIG. 33, the origin may be set at the left end of the room, forexample, the X axis and the Y axis may be set in the horizontaldirection and the vertical direction, respectively, and the position ofthe room may be represented by the X and Y coordinates.

Meanwhile, not only the room type 6802 but also the coordinate in theroom is registered in the arrangement 3104 of the device list 3100 shownin FIG. 71. This allows the display control section 103 to discriminatefrom the content of the arrangement 3104 at what position on the planview representing the room the device icon 501 is to be disposed.

In the present disclosure, the server 300 is not an essentialconstituent element, and various types of information managed by theserver 300 (such as the home information 2700 and the state of thedevices 200) may be managed by the home controller 100. This allows thepresent disclosure described above to be embodied without the server300. In this case, it is not necessary for the home controller 100 tomanage information on the entire house, and it is only necessary tomanage information related to the devices 200 controlled by the homecontroller 100 and the house in which the devices 200 are disposed.

(Device Icon Arranging Process 1)

Next, a device icon arranging process 1 in which a device icon isautomatically arranged on a floor plan will be described.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a basic screen that isdisplayed on the display 101 of the home controller 100, and FIG. 73 isa diagram showing a configuration of a display state of the devicecontrol screen 502 of the home controller 100.

On the basic screen shown in FIG. 72, when the touch panel controlsection 102 senses that the user has selected the device icon 501, thedisplay control section 103 displays the device control screen 502corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on the display 101. Thedevice control screen 502 is unique to each device 200 and is a controlscreen for controlling the device 200 or performing state confirmationof the device 200. For example, FIG. 73 shows an example where a deviceicon of an air conditioner has been selected by the user, in which casea temperature setting or an air flow direction of the air conditioner iscontrolled using the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner.Moreover, in FIG. 73, while a device icon is not arranged on the display101, a device icon may be displayed outside of a display region of thedevice control screen 502 as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16.

Next, a flow of a process for newly registering a device 200 in a homecontrol system (information management system) will be described withreference to the drawings. The home control system connects to a networkwhich controls one or more target devices managed in association with asame building ID, and manages information of the one or more targetdevices.

FIG. 74 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying process fordisplaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

First, when the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room insidethe house, the communication control section 217 of the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 (S70301).

FIG. 75A is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a refrigerator is newly registered,FIG. 75B is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a television set is newly registered,and FIG. 75C is a diagram showing an example of a device newregistration request that is transmitted when a humidifier is newlyregistered. As shown in FIGS. 75A to 75C, the device new registrationrequest includes a residence ID 70500 for identifying a residence inwhich the device 200 is arranged, a device ID 70501 for identifying thedevice 200, and a device type 70502 for identifying a type of the device200.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 inquiresa residence ID to the home controller 100, acquires the residence IDfrom the home controller 100, and creates a device new registrationrequest.

Moreover, while the communication control section 217 of the device 200acquires the residence ID from the home controller 100 in the presentembodiment, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto.When the device 200 and the server 300 are connected to each other via agateway installed in the home, the gateway may provide the residence ID.Specifically, the communication control section 217 of the device 200may transmit a device new registration request including the device ID70501 and the device type 70502, and the gateway may include theresidence ID in the device new registration request from the device 200and transmit the device new registration request to the server 300.Alternatively, the device 200 may accept input of a residence ID by theuser.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and performs aninitial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S70302). Moreover, the initial arrangementdeciding process by the server 300 will be described later.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S70303).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S70304).

The initial arrangement deciding process shown in FIG. 74 will now bedescribed in greater detail.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by the server 300.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not thedevice new registration request from the device 200 has been received(S70401). The server 300 receives, from one target device among the oneor more target devices via the network, a device new registrationrequest (registration notification information) representing that theone target device has been newly registered in the home control system(information management system).

At this point, when it is determined that the device new registrationrequest from the device 200 has not been received (NO in S70401), theprocess is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the device newregistration request from the device 200 has been received (YES inS70401), the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type of the device 200 to be registered(S70402). In this case, the storage section 304 of the server 300stores, in advance, a reference table that associates a device type anda room type with each other.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table 70600 thatassociates a device type 70601 and a room type 70602 with each other. Asshown in FIG. 77, the device type 70601 and the room type 70602 areassociated with each other. The storage section 304 is constituted byone memory and manages the device type 70601 (first information)indicating types of one or more device icons representing the one ormore target devices and the room type 70602 (second information)indicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms in associationwith each other. For example, the room type “kitchen” is associated withthe device type “refrigerator”, the room type “toilet” is associatedwith the device type “toilet seat apparatus”, the room types “livingroom” and “bedroom” are associated with the device type “airconditioner”, and the room types “living room”, “child room”, and“bedroom” are associated with the device type “television set”.

In the example shown in FIG. 77, the refrigerator and the toilet seatapparatus are respectively constituted by one tuple, the air conditioneris constituted by two tuples, and the television set is constituted bythree tuples. Moreover, in the case of a device type such as ahumidifier for which a room where the device type is arranged is notspecified, a room type need not be associated. Specifically, the storagesection 304 does not store data that associates the device type“humidifier” with a room type.

The device control section 302 searches for a room type corresponding tothe device type 70502 included in the received device new registrationrequest in the reference table 70600.

Moreover, while FIG. 77 shows one memory managing a device type and aroom type in association with each other, the present disclosure is notparticularly limited thereto and two or more memories may manage adevice type and a room type in association with each other.

FIGS. 78A to 78C are diagrams showing an example in which device typesand room types are managed by three reference tables. FIG. 78A is adiagram showing an example of a first reference table 706001 thatassociates a device ID 706011 and a device type name 706012 with eachother, FIG. 78B is a diagram showing an example of a second referencetable 706002 that associates a room ID 706013 and a room type name706014 with each other, and FIG. 78C is a diagram showing an example ofa third reference table 706003 that associates a device ID 706015 and aroom ID 706016 with each other.

The first reference table 706001 associates the device ID 706011 foridentifying the device 200 and the device type name 706012 representingthe name of the type of the device 200 with each other. The secondreference table 706002 associates the room ID 706013 for identifying aroom and the room type name 706014 representing the name of an attributeof the room with each other. The third reference table 706003 associatesthe device ID 706015 for identifying the device 200 and the room ID706016 for identifying a room with each other. The first reference table706001, the second reference table 706002, and the third reference table706003 may be respectively stored in different memories.

The device control section 302 searches for a room ID corresponding tothe device ID 70501 included in the received device new registrationrequest in the third reference table 706003 and searches for a room typename corresponding to the searched room ID in the second reference table706002.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a same room type asthe room type that is the search result in currently registered roominformation (S70403).

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of room information 70900. Theroom information 70900 includes a residence ID 70904, a room ID 70901, aroom type 70902, and room coordinates 70903. The residence ID 70904 isan identifier for identifying a residence. The room ID 70901 is anidentifier for identifying a room on the floor plan 500. The room type70902 indicates a type of the room. The room coordinates 70903 areexpressed by a set of vertex IDs and decide an area of a room on thefloor plan 500. For example, a room of which room ID is C is a bathroomand indicates a region formed by connecting vertex IDs in a sequence ofA, B, C, and F on the floor plan 500.

The device control section 302 searches for a same room type as the roomtype that is the search result in currently registered room information70900.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult (S70404). The chance of the newly registered device 200 beinginstalled is low in a room in which a device of a same type as thedevice 200 to be newly registered is already installed. Therefore, aroom in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed is excluded from installation candidatesof the device 200 to be newly registered.

FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a device list 70700 that is managed by theserver 300. As shown in FIG. 80, the device list 70700 includes aresidence ID 70706, a device ID 70701, a device type 70702, a modelnumber 70703, a room ID 70704, and an arrangement 70705.

The residence ID 70706 is an identifier of a residence. The device ID70701 is an identifier of the device 200. The device type 70702indicates a type of the device 200. The model number 70703 indicates amodel number of the device 200. The room ID 70704 is an identifier of aroom in which the device 200 is installed. The arrangement 70705 iscoordinates which are expressed by an (X coordinate, Y coordinate, floornumber) format and indicates an arrangement position on the floor plan500 of the device icon 501 corresponding to the device 200. Moreover,the device list 70700 may include capability information 4705 and acontrol command transmission destination 4706 as shown in FIG. 34.Alternatively, the device list 70700 may include a room typerepresenting an attribute of a room in which the device 200 is to bearranged.

The device control section 302 refers to the device list 70700,identifies a room ID corresponding to a same device type as the devicetype of the device 200 to be newly registered, and identifies a roomtype corresponding to the identified room ID. The device control section302 excludes the identified room type from the room types searched instep S70403.

Next, the device control section 302 determines the number of remainingroom types (S70405). In this case, when it is determined that the numberof remaining room types is two or more (“two or more” in S70405), thedevice control section 302 searches for a largest room among theremaining room types (S70406). At this point, the device control section302 searches for room IDs of the remaining room types and calculates anarea of each room of the remaining room types based on vertexinformation 70800 and room information 70900. In addition, the devicecontrol section 302 searches for a room with the largest area among thecalculated areas of the respective rooms of the remaining room types.

FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the vertex information 70800.As shown in FIG. 81, the vertex information 70800 includes a residenceID 70803, a vertex ID 70801, and vertex coordinates 70802. The residenceID 70803 is an identifier of a residence. The vertex ID 70801 is anidentifier for identifying a vertex on the floor plan 500. The vertexcoordinates 70802 are coordinates expressed by a (X coordinate, Ycoordinate, floor number) format and determine a position of a vertexsuch as a partition line shown on the floor plan 500. For example, sincea vertex of which vertex ID is B has vertex coordinates expressed as(X20, Y0, Z1), the vertex represents a position on the first floor(floor 1) of which X coordinate is 20 and Y coordinate is 0.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between eachvertex registered in the vertex information 70800 and the floor plan500. Note that, in FIG. 82, a top left vertex of the floor plan 500 isassumed to be an origin (both X coordinate and Y coordinate are 0). Forexample, since vertex coordinates of a vertex with a vertex ID of A areexpressed as (X0, Y0, Z1), the vertex is positioned on the origin. Inaddition, since vertex coordinates of a vertex with a vertex ID of B areexpressed as (X20, Y0, Z1), the vertex is positioned at a top rightvertex of the bathroom.

The server 300 includes the vertex information 70800 and the roominformation 70900. Therefore, by plotting vertices indicated by thevertex information 70800 on image data of the floor plan 500 andconnecting vertices indicated by room coordinates 70903 in the roominformation 70900, the device control section 302 can identify a regionof a room represented on the floor plan 500 and calculate an area of theidentified region.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remainingroom types is zero (“zero” in S70405), the device control section 302searches for a largest room among all rooms (S70407). At this point, thedevice control section 302 calculates areas of all rooms based on thevertex information 70800 and the room information 70900. In addition,the device control section 302 searches for a room with the largest areaamong the areas of all rooms.

In addition, when it is determined that the number of remaining roomtypes is one (“one” in S70405), when a largest room among the remainingroom types is searched in step S70406 or when a largest room among allrooms is searched in step S70407, the device control section 302transmits arrangement information including a device type indicating atype of the device icon, a room type of a corresponding room, a room IDof the corresponding room, and position information representing aposition of the corresponding room on the floor plan to the homecontroller 100 (S70408).

Moreover, in a similar manner to the room coordinates 70903, positioninformation is expressed by a set of vertex IDs 70801 and indicates aroom on the floor plan 500 in which is displayed a device icon 501corresponding to the device 200 to be newly registered. In addition, forexample, an arrangement position of the device icon 501 corresponding tothe device 200 to be newly registered is decided at a position that doesnot overlap with other device icons in the room.

When it is determined that the number of remaining room types is one,the device control section 302 searches for a room ID and positioninformation of the one remaining room type and transmits arrangementinformation including a device type indicating a type of the deviceicon, the one remaining room type, the searched room ID, and positioninformation representing coordinates of the one remaining room to thehome controller 100.

In addition, when a largest room among the remaining room types issearched in step S70406, the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type indicating a type of thedevice icon, a room type of the largest room among the remaining roomtypes, a room ID of the largest room among the remaining room types, andposition information representing coordinates of the largest room amongthe remaining room types to the home controller 100.

Furthermore, when a largest room among all rooms is searched in stepS70407, the device control section 302 transmits arrangement informationincluding a device type indicating a type of the device icon, a roomtype of the largest room among the rooms, a room ID of the largest roomamong the rooms, and position information representing coordinates ofthe largest room among the rooms to the home controller 100.

Moreover, the device control section 302 may store a room type of acorresponding room, a room ID of the corresponding room, and positioninformation representing coordinates of the corresponding room in thedevice list 70700.

As described above, using one or two or more memories that manage, inassociation with each other, the device type 70601 (first information)indicating types of one or more device icons representing each of one ormore target devices and the room type 70602 (second information)indicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms included in adisplay screen representing a floor plan of a residence (building)indicated by a residence ID (building ID), an attribute of a roomcorresponding to a type of a device icon representing one target deviceis determined based on the received device new registration request(registration notification information).

In addition, a device type (third information) indicating a type of adevice icon representing the one target device and a room type (fourthinformation) indicating the determined attribute of the room aretransmitted via the network to the home controller 100 (informationapparatus) which is managed in association with the same residence IDand which displays a display screen representing the floor plan 500 onthe display 101. Based on the device type (third information) and theroom type (fourth information), the device icon representing the onetarget device is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to the device icon on thedisplay 101 of the home controller 100 (information apparatus).

Furthermore, the one or two or more memories further manage positioninformation (fifth information) of each of one or more rooms on thefloor plan. Using the position information (fifth information), positioninformation indicating a region corresponding to a room that correspondsto a type of the device icon representing the one target device isdetermined. In addition, the determined position information istransmitted to the home controller 100 (information apparatus) via thenetwork. Based on the transmitted position information, the device iconrepresenting the one target device is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to the deviceicon on the display 101 of the home controller 100 (informationapparatus).

Moreover, based on the device type 70601 (first information), when it isdetermined that the device icon representing the one target device maypotentially correspond to a plurality of rooms among the one or morerooms, a largest room among the plurality of potentially correspondingrooms is determined as the room corresponding to a type of the deviceicon representing the one target device. Subsequently, a room type(fourth information) indicating the determined attribute of the room istransmitted to the home controller 100 (information apparatus) via thenetwork.

A specific displaying process of a device icon will now be described.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a refrigerator. Inthe following description, the device to be newly registered is arefrigerator and the device list 70700 does not store data correspondingto the refrigerator. In addition, only the room type “kitchen” isassociated with the device type “refrigerator”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the refrigerator thathas been newly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300receives the device new registration request shown in FIG. 75A from therefrigerator.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 70502 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 70600 (FIG. 77). In thiscase, since the device type 70502 is a refrigerator, the device controlsection 302 extracts the room type “kitchen” from the reference table70600.

The device control section 302 then searches for a same room type as theroom type that is the search result in currently registered roominformation 70900 (FIG. 79). In this case, since the room type that isthe search result is the kitchen, the device control section 302 selectsthe kitchen from the room information 70900.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult. In this case, since the refrigerator is not stored in the devicelist 70700, only the room type that is the search result (kitchen) isretained.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined as one, andthe device control section 302 searches for a room ID (F) and positioninformation (room coordinates) of the one remaining room type (kitchen).Subsequently, the device control section 302 transmits arrangementinformation including a device type (refrigerator) indicating a type ofthe device icon, the one remaining room type (kitchen), the searchedroom ID, and position information representing coordinates of the oneremaining room to the home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 71101 of the newlyregistered refrigerator on the floor plan 500 based on the arrangementinformation. In this case, the device icon 71101 of the refrigerator isdisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to thekitchen. In this manner, since a room corresponding to the refrigeratoris uniquely determined, the device icon 71101 of the refrigerator isdisplayed in the kitchen.

As described above, when the device icon representing one target deviceis determined to be a refrigerator icon representing a refrigeratorbased on the device type 70601 (first information) indicating types ofone or more device icons presenting each of one or more target devices,the refrigerator icon is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the kitchen.

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a television set. Inthe following description, the device to be newly registered is atelevision set and the device list 70700 stores data representing thatone television set is already arranged in the bedroom. In addition, theroom types “living room”, “child room”, and “bedroom” are associatedwith the device type “television set”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the television set thathas been newly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300receives the device new registration request shown in FIG. 75B from thetelevision set.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 70502 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 70600 (FIG. 77). In thiscase, since the device type 70502 is a television set, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts the three room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” from the reference table 70600.

The device control section 302 then searches for a same room type as theroom type that is the search result in currently registered roominformation 70900 (FIG. 79). In this case, since the room types that arethe search result are the living room, the child room, and the bedroom,the device control section 302 searches for the living room, the childroom, and the bedroom in the room information 70900.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult. In this case, since a television set is already arranged in thebedroom, the living room and the child room remain among the room typesthat are the search result.

Therefore, a determination is made that the number of remaining roomtypes is two or more, and the device control section 302 searches forthe room IDs of the remaining room types and calculates an area of eachroom of the remaining room types based on the vertex information 70800and the room information 70900. In this case, since the two remainingroom types are the living room and the child room, the device controlsection 302 calculates the areas of the living room and the child room.

In addition, the device control section 302 searches for a room with thelargest area among the calculated areas of the respective rooms of theremaining room types. In this case, since the area of the living room islarger than the area of the child room, the device control section 302selects the living room as the room with the largest area among theareas of the respective rooms of the remaining room types. Subsequently,the device control section 302 transmits arrangement informationincluding a device type (television set) indicating a type of the deviceicon, a room type (living room) of a largest room among the remainingroom types, a room ID of the largest room among the remaining roomtypes, and position information representing coordinates of the largestroom among the remaining room types to the home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 71201 of the newlyregistered television set on the floor plan 500 based on the arrangementinformation. In this case, the device icon 71201 of the television setis displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to theliving room. In this manner, since there are two or more roomscorresponding to the television set, the device icon 71201 of thetelevision set is displayed in the living room that is the largest roomamong the two or more rooms (the living room and the child room).

As described above, when the device icon representing one target deviceis determined to be a television set icon representing a television setbased on the device type 70601 (first information) indicating types ofone or more device icons representing each of one or more targetdevices, the television set icon is displayed in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to the living room.

FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a humidifier. In thefollowing description, the device to be newly registered is a humidifierand the device list 70700 does not store data corresponding to thehumidifier. In addition, a room type is not associated with the devicetype “humidifier”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the humidifier that hasbeen newly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300receives the device new registration request shown in FIG. 75C from thehumidifier.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 70502 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 70600 (FIG. 77). In thiscase, while the device type 70502 is the humidifier, there is no roomtype corresponding to the “humidifier” in the reference table 70600.Therefore, the device control section 302 does not extract a room typecorresponding to the humidifier.

The device control section 302 then searches for a same room type as theroom type that is the search result in currently registered roominformation 70900 (FIG. 79). In this case, since there is no room typethat is the search result, the device control section 302 does notselect a room type from the room information 70900.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult. In this case, since the humidifier is not stored in the devicelist 70700 and there is no corresponding room type, no room typeremains.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined as zero andthe device control section 302 calculates areas of all rooms based onthe vertex information 70800 and the room information 70900. Inaddition, the device control section 302 searches for a room with thelargest area among the areas of all rooms. In this case, since the areaof the living room is larger than the areas of other rooms, the devicecontrol section 302 selects the living room as the room with the largestarea among the areas of all rooms. Subsequently, the device controlsection 302 transmits arrangement information including a device type(humidifier) indicating a type of the device icon, a room type (livingroom) of a largest room among all room types, a room ID of the largestroom among all room types, and position information representingcoordinates of the largest room among all room types to the homecontroller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 71301 of the newlyregistered humidifier on the floor plan 500 based on the arrangementinformation. In this case, the device icon 71301 of the humidifier isdisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to the livingroom. As described above, since the humidifier does not have acorresponding room, the device icon 71301 of the humidifier is displayedin the living room that is a largest room among all rooms.

Next, another example of the initial arrangement deciding process shownin FIG. 74 will be described.

FIG. 86 is a flow chart for explaining another example of the initialarrangement deciding process by the server 300. Since the processperformed in steps S71401 to S71404 in FIG. 86 is the same as theprocess performed in steps S70401 to S70404 shown in FIG. 76, adescription thereof will be omitted.

The device control section 302 determines the number of remaining roomtypes (S71405). In this case, when the number of remaining room types isdetermined to be other than one or, in other words, when the number ofremaining room types is determined to be zero or two or more (“otherthan one” in S71405), the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type indicating a type of adevice icon representing one target device and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen(S71406).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remainingroom types is one (“one” in S71405), the device control section 302searches for a room ID and position information of the one remainingroom type and transmits arrangement information including a device typeindicating a type of the device icon, a room type of a correspondingroom, a room ID of the corresponding room, and position informationrepresenting a position of the corresponding room on the floor plan tothe home controller 100 (S71407).

As described above, when there is a room corresponding to a type of adevice icon representing one target device, a device type (thirdinformation) indicating a type of the device icon representing onetarget device and a room type (fourth information) indicating thedetermined attribute of the room are transmitted via the network to thehome controller 100 (information apparatus) which is managed inassociation with the same residence ID (building ID) and which displaysa display screen representing the floor plan on the display. Meanwhile,when there is no room corresponding to the type of the device iconrepresenting the one target device, a device type (third information)indicating a type of the device icon representing the one target deviceand display region information (fifth information) indicating aprescribed region on the display screen are transmitted via the networkto the home controller 100 (information apparatus).

Subsequently, based on the device type (third information) and the roomtype (fourth information), the device icon representing the one targetdevice is displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to aroom that corresponds to the device icon on the display 101 of the homecontroller 100 (information apparatus). In addition, based on the devicetype (third information) and the display region information (fifthinformation), the device icon representing the one target device isdisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to theprescribed region.

A specific displaying process of a device icon will now be described.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a television set. Inthe following description, the device to be newly registered is atelevision set and the device list 70700 stores data representing thatone television set is already arranged in the bedroom. In addition, theroom types “living room”, “child room”, and “bedroom” are associatedwith the device type “television set”.

Moreover, a process up to determining the number of remaining room typesis the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 84.

The device control section 302 excludes a room type corresponding to aroom in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult. In this case, since a television set is already arranged in thebedroom, the living room and the child room remain among the room typesthat are the search result.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined to be otherthan one and the device control section 302 transmits arrangementinformation including a device type (television set) indicating a typeof a device icon representing the one target device and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen to thehome controller 100. Moreover, the prescribed region on the displayscreen is a region outside the display region of the floor plan 500.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays the device icon 71201 of thenewly registered television set on the display 101 based on thearrangement information. In this case, the device icon 71201 of thetelevision set is displayed in a region outside the display region ofthe floor plan 500. As described above, since there are two or morerooms corresponding to the television set, the device icon 71201 of thetelevision set is displayed in a region outside the display region ofthe floor plan 500.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a humidifier. In thefollowing description, the device to be newly registered is a humidifierand the device list 70700 does not store data corresponding to thehumidifier. In addition, a room type is not associated with the devicetype “humidifier”.

Moreover, a process up to determining the number of remaining room typesis the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 85.

The device control section 302 excludes a room type corresponding to aroom in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult. In this case, since the humidifier is not stored in the devicelist 70700 and there is no corresponding room type, no room typeremains.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined to be zeroand the device control section 302 transmits arrangement informationincluding a device type (humidifier) indicating a type of a device iconrepresenting the one target device and display region informationindicating a prescribed region on the display screen to the homecontroller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays the device icon 71601 of thenewly registered humidifier on the display 101 based on the arrangementinformation. In this case, the device icon 71601 of the humidifier isdisplayed in a region outside the display region of the floor plan 500.As described above, since there are no rooms corresponding to thehumidifier, the device icon 71601 of the humidifier is displayed in aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500.

Moreover, while the device icon of a newly registered device isdisplayed in a region outside the display region of the floor plan 500when the number of remaining room types is other than one in thedescription of FIGS. 86 to 88, the present disclosure is notparticularly limited thereto. When the number of remaining room types isother than one, the device icon of a newly registered device may bedisplayed in a region corresponding to a largest room among the one ormore rooms included in the floor plan 500. In this case, a displayresult is the same as the display result shown in FIG. 84.

In addition, when the one or more device icons include two or moredevice icons of the same type, one device icon among the two or moredevice icons of the same type may be displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to the onedevice icon and the other device icons may be displayed in a prescribedregion on the display screen. For example, where there are two deviceicons of a television set, one device icon among the two device iconsmay be displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to thebedroom which corresponds to the one device icon and the other deviceicon may be displayed in a region outside the display region of thefloor plan 500. In this case, a display result is the same as thedisplay result shown in FIG. 87. Moreover, the other device icons may bedisplayed in a region corresponding to a largest room among the one ormore rooms included in the floor plan 500.

While a bird's eye view representing positions and shapes of roomsconstituting each floor in a planar manner is adopted as the floor plan500 in the description given above, the present embodiment is notlimited thereto and a diagram showing what kind of and how many roomsare on each floor in a simplified manner may also be adopted as a floorplan.

Hereinafter, a different pattern of a floor plan will be specificallydescribed. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern. On the floor plan 5200, one room constituting onefloor is represented by one square block and respective rooms on onefloor are arranged in a matrix pattern. In addition, sizes of therespective blocks are the same, and a name and an area of a room aredescribed in each block.

For example, the floor plan 5200 includes the respective rooms of aliving room, a kitchen, a dining room, a bathroom, a washroom, a toilet,a bedroom, and a child room. In addition, a device icon 501 of anactually arranged device 200 is displayed in each room. For example, thedevice icon 501 of an illumination device displayed in the living roomsignifies that an illumination device is installed in the living room.

Even when such a floor plan 5200 is displayed, a device icon of a deviceto be newly registered can be displayed in the same manner as describedearlier.

FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a device to be newly registered on the floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern.

On the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 90, a display method of a deviceicon when a device is to be newly registered is almost the same as thedisplay method of a device icon on the floor plan 500 described earlier.A difference is that an area of each room is stored in advance inassociation to each room. When searching for a largest room among theremaining rooms in step S70406 or when searching for a largest roomamong all rooms in step S70407 in FIG. 76, the device control section302 reads out and uses areas stored in advance instead of calculatingareas from vertex coordinates and the like.

In FIG. 90, a device icon 71201 of a newly registered television set isdisplayed on the floor plan 5200. When the television set is newlyregistered, a television set is not arranged in any of the rooms.Therefore, the device icon 71201 of the newly registered television setis displayed in a region corresponding to the living room which is thelargest room among the living room, the bedroom, and the child room.

While an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to a deviceto be newly registered is decided by the server 300 in the descriptiongiven above, the present disclosure is not particularly limited theretoand the arrangement position may be decided by the home controller 100.A process for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered by the home controller100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 91.

FIG. 91 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S70301).

Next, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request from the device 200 andperforms an initial arrangement deciding process for deciding anarrangement position on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding tothe device 200 to be newly registered (S70302). Moreover, the initialarrangement deciding process by the home controller 100 will bedescribed later.

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S70304).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S71901). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300. In addition, when the arrangementinformation is not transmitted to the server 300, the home controlsystem need not include the server 300.

The initial arrangement deciding process shown in FIG. 91 will now bedescribed in greater detail.

FIG. 92 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by the home controller 100.

Since the process performed in steps S72401 to S72407 in FIG. 92 is thesame as the process performed in steps S70401 to S70407 shown in FIG.76, a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the devicemanagement section 105 of the home controller 100 executes the processof steps S72401 to S72407 in place of the device control section 302 ofthe server 300. Furthermore, the home controller 100 stores thereference table 70600 (FIG. 77), the room information 70900 (FIG. 79),the device list 70700 (FIG. 80), and the vertex information 70800 (FIG.81).

When it is determined that the number of remaining room types is one(“one” in S72405), when a largest room among the remaining room types issearched in step S72406, or when a largest room among all rooms issearched in step S72407, the device management section 105 decides adevice type indicating a type of the device icon, a room type of acorresponding room, a room ID of the corresponding room, and positioninformation representing a position of the corresponding room on thefloor plan (S72408).

When it is determined that the number of remaining room types is one,the device management section 105 searches for a room ID and positioninformation of the one remaining room type and decides a device typeindicating a type of the device icon, the one remaining room type, thesearched room ID, and position information representing coordinates ofthe one remaining room.

In addition, when a largest room among the remaining room types issearched in step S72406, the device management section 105 decides adevice type indicating a type of the device icon, a room type of thelargest room among the remaining room types, a room ID of the largestroom among the remaining room types, and position informationrepresenting coordinates of the largest room among the remaining roomtypes.

Furthermore, when a largest room among all rooms is searched in stepS72407, the device management section 105 decides a device typeindicating a type of the device icon, a room type of the largest roomamong the rooms, a room ID of the largest room among the rooms, andposition information representing coordinates of the largest room amongthe rooms.

Next, the display control section 103 displays a device iconcorresponding to the newly registered device 200 on the floor plan basedon the decided device type, room type, room ID, and position informationand updates the display screen (S72409).

Moreover, the display control section 103 displays a display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500 including one or more rooms on thedisplay 101. In addition, the display control section 103 uses one ortwo or more memories that manage, in association with each other, adevice type (first information) indicating types of one or more deviceicons representing each of one or more target devices and a room type(second information) indicating an attribute of each of the one or morerooms and displays the one or more device icons in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of theone or more device icons in accordance with the types of the one or moredevice icons.

Furthermore, when selection of any of the one or more device icons issensed in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in thefloor plan 500, the display control section 103 displays a controlscreen for at least any of operation and state confirmation of a targetdevice corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500. Subsequently, based on an operation onthe control screen, the communication control section 107 outputs acontrol command for at least any of the operation and the stateconfirmation of the target device corresponding to the selected deviceicon to the network.

In addition, the display control section 103 may use a device type(first information) and a room type (second information) to determine aroom corresponding to each of one or more device icons in accordancewith the types of the one or more device icons. Furthermore, the displaycontrol section 103 may display each of the one or more device icons ina region on the display screen corresponding to the determined room.

In addition, the one or two or more memories may further manage positioninformation (third information) of each of one or more rooms on thefloor plan 500. The display control section 103 may determine a regioncorresponding to each of the one or more rooms using the positioninformation (third information). Furthermore, the display controlsection 103 may display one or more device icons in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of theone or more device icons in accordance with the types of the one or moredevice icons.

In addition, the display control section 103 may use a device type(first information) and a room type (second information) to determine aroom corresponding to each of one or more device icons in accordancewith the types of the one or more device icons. Furthermore, the displaycontrol section 103 may determine a region corresponding to each of theone or more rooms using the position information (third information).The display control section 103 may display each of the one or moredevice icons in a region on the display screen corresponding to thedetermined room.

In addition, when it is determined that one device icon among the one ormore device icons may potentially correspond to a plurality of roomsamong the one or more rooms based on the device type (firstinformation), the display control section 103 may display the one deviceicon in a region on the display screen corresponding to a largest roomamong the plurality of potentially corresponding rooms.

Furthermore, when the one device icon is determined to be a televisionset icon representing a television set based on the device type (firstinformation), the display control section 103 may display the televisionset icon in a region on the display screen corresponding to the livingroom.

In addition, when it is determined that a type of one device icon amongone or more device icons is a type to be displayed on the display screenfor the first time and that the one device icon may potentiallycorrespond to a plurality of rooms among the one or more rooms based onthe device type (first information), the display control section 103 maydisplay the one device icon in a region on the display screencorresponding to a largest room among the plurality of potentiallycorresponding rooms.

Furthermore, when it is determined that a type of one device icon amongone or more device icons is a type to be displayed on the display screenfor the first time and that the one device icon is a television set iconrepresenting a television set based on the device type (firstinformation), the display control section 103 may display the televisionset icon in a region on the display screen corresponding to the livingroom.

In addition, when the one device icon among the one or more device iconsis determined to be a refrigerator icon representing a refrigeratorbased on the device type (first information), the display controlsection 103 may display the refrigerator icon in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to the kitchen.

Subsequently, another example of the initial arrangement decidingprocess shown in FIG. 91 will be described in greater detail.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart for explaining another example of the initialarrangement deciding process by the home controller 100.

Since the process performed in steps S73401 to S73405 in FIG. 93 is thesame as the process performed in steps S71401 to S71405 shown in FIG.86, a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the devicemanagement section 105 of the home controller 100 executes the processof steps S73401 to S73405 in place of the device control section 302 ofthe server 300. Furthermore, the home controller 100 stores thereference table 70600 (FIG. 77), the room information 70900 (FIG. 79),the device list 70700 (FIG. 80), and the vertex information 70800 (FIG.81).

When the number of remaining room types is determined to be other thanone or, in other words, when the number of remaining room types isdetermined to be zero or two or more (“other than one” in S73405), thedevice management section 105 decides a device type indicating a type ofa device icon representing one target device and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen(S73406).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remainingroom types is one (“one” in S73405), the device management section 105searches for a room ID and position information of the one remainingroom type and decides a device type indicating a type of the deviceicon, a room type of a corresponding room, a room ID of thecorresponding room, and position information representing a position ofthe corresponding room on the floor plan (S73407).

Next, the display control section 103 displays a device iconcorresponding to the newly registered device 200 and updates the displayscreen (S73408). At this point, when it is determined that the number ofremaining room types is other than one, the display control section 103displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200outside the floor plan based on the device type and display regioninformation and updates the display screen. On the other hand, when itis determined that the number of remaining room types is one, thedisplay control section 103 displays a device icon corresponding to thenewly registered device 200 on the floor plan based on the decideddevice type, room type, room ID, and position information, and updatesthe display screen.

Moreover, the display control section 103 displays a display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500 including one or more rooms on thedisplay 101. In addition, the display control section 103 uses one ortwo or more memories that manage, in association with each other, adevice type (first information) indicating types of one or more deviceicons representing each of one or more target devices and a room type(second information) indicating an attribute of each of the one or morerooms to display a device icon with a corresponding room to the type ofthe device icon among the one or more device icons in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to the room that corresponds to the deviceicon and to display a device icon without a corresponding room to thetype of the device icon among the one or more device icons in aprescribed region on the display screen.

Furthermore, when selection of any of the one or more device icons issensed in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in thefloor plan 500, the display control section 103 displays a controlscreen for at least any of operation and state confirmation of a targetdevice corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500. Subsequently, based on an operation onthe control screen, the communication control section 107 outputs acontrol command for at least any of the operation and the stateconfirmation of the target device corresponding to the selected deviceicon to the network.

In addition, when the one or more device icons include two or moredevice icons of the same type, the display control section 103 maydisplay one device icon among the two or more device icons of the sametype in a region on the display screen corresponding to a room thatcorresponds to the one device icon and the other device icons to bedisplayed in a prescribed region on the display screen.

Moreover, the prescribed region may be a region outside the displayregion of the floor plan 500 in the display screen. Alternatively, theprescribed region may be a region corresponding to a largest room amongthe one or more rooms included in the floor plan 500.

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the server 300 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 74, thepresent disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and the device200 may transmit a device new registration request to the homecontroller 100 and the home controller 100 may transmit a devicearrangement request for requesting that a display position of a deviceicon corresponding to a newly registered device be determined to theserver 300. A process for deciding an arrangement position of a deviceicon corresponding to a device to be newly registered by the server 300when the device 200 transmits a device new registration request to thehome controller 100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 94.

FIG. 94 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the server300 for deciding an arrangement position of a device icon correspondingto a device to be newly registered when the device 200 transmits adevice new registration request to the home controller 100.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S70301).In this case, the device new registration request includes a device IDand a device type.

Next, the communication control section 107 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request transmitted by the device200 and transmits a device arrangement request for requesting that adisplay position of a device icon corresponding to a newly registereddevice be decided to the server 300 (S72001). In this case, the devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype. The communication control section 107 creates a device arrangementrequest in which a residence ID is added to the device ID and the devicetype included in the received device new registration request andtransmits the device arrangement request.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice arrangement request from the device 200 and performs an initialarrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangement position on thefloor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device 200 to be newlyregistered (S70302). Moreover, the initial arrangement deciding processis as described earlier.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S70303).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S70304).

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the home controller 100 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG.91, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and thedevice 200 may transmit a device new registration request to the server300 and the server 300 may transmit a device arrangement request forrequesting that a display position of a device icon corresponding to anewly registered device be decided to the home controller 100. A processfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered by the home controller 100 when the device200 transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 willnow be described with reference to FIG. 95.

FIG. 95 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the server 300 (S70301). The devicenew registration request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and adevice type.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and transmits adevice arrangement request for requesting that a display position of adevice icon corresponding to a newly registered device be decided to thehome controller 100 (S72101). At this point, the device control section302 stores the newly registered device in a device list. The devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype.

Next, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100receives the device arrangement request from the server 300 and performsan initial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S70302). Moreover, the initial arrangementdeciding process is as described earlier.

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S70304).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S71901). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300.

(Device Icon Arranging Process 2)

Next, a device icon arranging process 2 in which a device icon isautomatically arranged on a floor plan will be described.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of a basic screen that isdisplayed on the display 101 of the home controller 100, and FIG. 97 isa diagram showing a configuration of a display state of the devicecontrol screen 502 of the home controller 100.

On the basic screen shown in FIG. 96, when the touch panel controlsection 102 senses that the user has selected the device icon 501, thedisplay control section 103 displays the device control screen 502corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on the display 101. Thedevice control screen 502 is unique to each device 200 and is a controlscreen for controlling the device 200 or performing state confirmationof the device 200. For example, FIG. 97 shows an example where a deviceicon of an air conditioner has been selected by the user, in which casea temperature setting or an air flow direction of the air conditioner iscontrolled using the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner.Moreover, in FIG. 97, while a device icon is not arranged on the display101, a device icon may be displayed outside of a display region of thedevice control screen 502 as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16.

Next, a flow of a process for newly registering a device 200 in a homecontrol system (information management system) will be described withreference to the drawings. The home control system connects to a networkwhich controls one or more target devices managed in association with asame building ID, and manages information of the one or more targetdevices.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that isdisplayed on the display 101 of the home controller 100 before a deviceis newly registered. As shown in FIG. 98, the floor plan 500 isdisplayed on the display 101 of the home controller 100. A device icon501 corresponding to a device arranged in each room is displayed on thefloor plan 500.

FIG. 99 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying process fordisplaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

First, when the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room insidethe house, the communication control section 217 of the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 (S90401).

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a television set is to be newlyregistered. As shown in FIG. 100, the device new registration requestincludes a residence ID 90600 for identifying a residence in which thedevice 200 is to be arranged, a device ID 90601 for identifying thedevice 200, a device type 90602 for identifying a type of the device200, and a performance 90603 representing the performance of the device200. In the case of a television set, a performance thereof represents ascreen size. The performance 90603 shown in FIG. 100 indicates that thetelevision set has a 65 v size.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 inquiresa residence ID to the home controller 100, acquires the residence IDfrom the home controller 100, and creates a device new registrationrequest.

Moreover, while the communication control section 217 of the device 200acquires the residence ID from the home controller 100 in the presentembodiment, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto.When the device 200 and the server 300 are connected to each other via agateway installed in the home, the gateway may provide the residence ID.Specifically, the communication control section 217 of the device 200may transmit a device new registration request including the device ID70501 and the device type 70502, and the gateway may include theresidence ID in the device new registration request from the device 200and transmit the device new registration request to the server 300.Alternatively, the device 200 may accept input of a residence ID by theuser.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and performs aninitial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S90402). Moreover, the initial arrangementdeciding process by the server 300 will be described later.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S90403).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S90404).

The initial arrangement deciding process shown in FIG. 99 will now bedescribed in greater detail.

FIG. 101 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by the server 300.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not thedevice new registration request from the device 200 has been received(S90501). The server 300 receives, from one target device among the oneor more target devices via the network, a device new registrationrequest (registration notification information) representing that theone target device has been newly registered in the home control system(information management system).

At this point, when it is determined that the device new registrationrequest from the device 200 has not been received (NO in S90501), theprocess is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the device newregistration request from the device 200 has been received (YES inS90501), the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type of the device 200 to be registered(S90502). In this case, the storage section 304 of the server 300stores, in advance, a reference table that associates a device type anda room type with each other.

FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table 906100that associates a device type 906101 and a room type 906102 with eachother. As shown in FIG. 102, the device type 906101 and the room type906102 are associated with each other. The storage section 304 isconstituted by one memory and manages the device type 906101 (firstinformation) indicating types of one or more device icons representingthe one or more target devices and the room type 906102 (secondinformation) indicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms inassociation with each other. For example, the room type “kitchen” isassociated with the device type “refrigerator”, the room type “toilet”is associated with the device type “toilet seat apparatus”, the roomtypes “living room”, “child room”, and “bedroom” are associated with thedevice type “air conditioner”, and the room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” are associated with the device type “televisionset”.

In the example shown in FIG. 102, the refrigerator and the toilet seatapparatus are respectively constituted by one tuple, the air conditioneris constituted by three tuples, and the television set is constituted bythree tuples. Moreover, in the case of a device type such as ahumidifier for which a room where the device type is arranged is notspecified, a room type need not be associated. Specifically, the storagesection 304 does not store data that associates the device type“humidifier” with a room type.

The device control section 302 searches for a room type corresponding tothe device type 90602 included in the received device new registrationrequest in the reference table 906100.

Moreover, while FIG. 102 shows one memory managing a device type and aroom type in association with each other, the present disclosure is notparticularly limited thereto and two or more memories may manage adevice type and a room type in association with each other.

FIGS. 103A to 103C are diagrams showing an example in which device typesand room types are managed by three reference tables. FIG. 103A is adiagram showing an example of a first reference table 906201 thatassociates a device ID 906111 and a device type name 906112 with eachother, FIG. 103B is a diagram showing an example of a second referencetable 906202 that associates a room ID 906113 and a room type name906114 with each other, and FIG. 103C is a diagram showing an example ofa third reference table 906203 that associates a device ID 906115 and aroom ID 906116 with each other.

The first reference table 906201 associates the device ID 906111 foridentifying the device 200 and the device type name 906112 representingthe name of the type of the device 200 with each other. The secondreference table 906202 associates the room ID 906113 for identifying aroom and the room type name 906114 representing the name of an attributeof the room with each other. The third reference table 906203 associatesthe device ID 906115 for identifying the device 200 and the room ID906116 for identifying a room with each other. The first reference table906201, the second reference table 906202, and the third reference table906203 may be respectively stored in different memories.

The device control section 302 searches for a room ID corresponding tothe device ID 90601 included in the received device new registrationrequest in the third reference table 906203 and searches for a room typename corresponding to the searched room ID in the second reference table906202.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room type with asize corresponding to the performance of the device to be registeredamong the room types that are search results (S90503). In this case, thestorage section 304 of the server 300 stores, in advance, a referencetable that associates a device performance and a room size with eachother.

FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table thatassociates a device performance and a room size with each other. Asshown in FIG. 104, a performance ID 90701 for identifying a performanceof a device, a performance 90702 representing the performance of thedevice, a smallest room size 90703, and a largest room size 90704 areassociated with each other. Moreover, the performance shown in FIG. 104represents the performance of a television set and, more specifically, ascreen size.

For example, a smallest room size “0 m²” and a largest room size “10 m²”are associated with the performance “32 v”, a smallest room size “7 m²”and a largest room size “10 m²” are associated with the performance “37v”, a smallest room size “10 m²” and a largest room size “13 m²” areassociated with the performance “40 v”, and a smallest room size “10 m²”and a largest room size “13 m²” are associated with the performance “42v”.

In other words, a size range of 0 to 10 m² is associated with theperformance “32 v” and a size range of 7 to 10 m² is associated with theperformance “37 v”.

FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of the vertex information90800. As shown in FIG. 105, the vertex information 90800 includes aresidence ID 90803, a vertex ID 90801, and vertex coordinates 90802. Theresidence ID 90803 is an identifier of a residence. The vertex ID 90801is an identifier for identifying a vertex on the floor plan 500. Thevertex coordinates 90802 are coordinates expressed by a (X coordinate. Ycoordinate, floor number) format and indicate a position of a vertexsuch as a partition line represented on the floor plan 500. For example,since a vertex of which vertex ID is B has vertex coordinates expressedas (X20, Y0, Z1), the vertex represents a position on the first floor(floor 1) of which X coordinate is 20 and Y coordinate is 0.

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of room information 90900. Theroom information 90900 includes a residence ID 90904, a room ID 90901, aroom type 90902, and room coordinates 90903. The residence ID 90904 isan identifier for identifying a residence. The room ID 90901 is anidentifier for identifying a room on the floor plan 500. The room type90902 indicates a type of the room. The room coordinates 90903 areexpressed by a set of vertex IDs and decide an area of a room on thefloor plan 500. For example, a room of which room ID is C is a bathroomand represents a region formed by connecting vertex IDs in a sequence ofA, B, G and F on the floor plan 500.

Moreover, while a size of a room is described in the room information90900 shown in FIG. 106, information regarding the size of the room isnot included in the room information 90900. In FIG. 106, while the sizeof a room is described for the sake of brevity, the size of the room iscalculated based on vertex coordinates or the like.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between eachvertex registered in the vertex information 90800 and the floor plan500. Note that, in FIG. 107, a top left vertex of the floor plan 500 isassumed to be an origin (both X coordinate and Y coordinate are 0). Forexample, since vertex coordinates of a vertex with a vertex ID of A areexpressed as (X0, Y0, Z1), the vertex is positioned on the origin. Inaddition, since vertex coordinates of a vertex with a vertex ID of B areexpressed as (X20, Y0, Z1), the vertex is positioned at a top rightvertex of the bathroom.

The server 300 includes the vertex information 90800 and the roominformation 90900. Therefore, by plotting vertices indicated by thevertex information 70800 on image data of the floor plan 500 andconnecting vertices indicated by room coordinates 70903 in the roominformation 70900, the device control section 302 can identify a regionof the room represented on the floor plan 500 and calculate an area ofthe identified region. The sizes shown in FIG. 106 indicate areas of therespective rooms as calculated by the device control section 302.

The device control section 302 calculates an area of a room typecorresponding to a device type of the device to be registered based onthe vertex information 90800 and the room information 90900. Inaddition, the device control section 302 searches for a size range of aroom corresponding to the performance of the device to be registered inthe reference table 90700. Subsequently, the device control section 302searches for a room type corresponding to an area included in thesearched size range among the calculated areas of room types.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult (S90504). The chance of the newly registered device 200 beinginstalled is low in a room in which a device of a same type as thedevice 200 to be newly registered is already installed. Therefore, aroom in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed is excluded from installation candidatesof the device 200 to be newly registered.

The device control section 302 refers to the device list 70700 (FIG.80), identifies a room ID corresponding to a same device type as thedevice type of the device 200 to be newly registered, and identifies aroom type corresponding to the identified room ID. The device controlsection 302 excludes the identified room type from the room typessearched in step S90503.

Next, the device control section 302 determines the number of remainingroom types (S90505). In this case, when the number of remaining roomtypes is determined to be other than one or, in other words, when thenumber of remaining room types is determined to be zero or two or more(“other than one” in S90505), the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type indicating a type of adevice icon representing one target device and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen(S90506).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remainingroom types is one (“one” in S90505), the device control section 302searches for a room ID and position information of the one remainingroom type and transmits arrangement information including a device typeindicating a type of the device icon, a room type of a correspondingroom, a room ID of the corresponding room, and position informationrepresenting a position of the corresponding room on the floor plan tothe home controller 100 (S90507).

As described above, using one or two or more memories that manage, inassociation with each other, a device type (first information)indicating types of one or more device icons representing each of one ormore target devices, performance information (second information)indicating a performance of a target device corresponding to the one ormore device icons, and a room type (third information) indicating anattribute of each of the one or more rooms included in a display screenrepresenting a floor plan of a building indicated by a same residence ID(building ID), an attribute of a room corresponding to a type of adevice icon representing one target device and to a performance of theone target device is determined based on the received device newregistration request (registration notification information).

In addition, a device type (fourth information) indicating a type of adevice icon representing the one target device and a room type (fifthinformation) indicating the determined attribute of the room aretransmitted via the network to the home controller 100 (informationapparatus) which is managed in association with the same residence ID(building ID) and which displays a display screen representing a floorplan on a display.

Based on the device type (fourth information) and the room type (fifthinformation), the device icon representing the one target device isdisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to a room thatcorresponds to the device icon on the display 101 of the home controller100 (information apparatus).

Furthermore, the one or two or more memories further manage positioninformation (sixth information) of each of the one or more rooms on thefloor plan. Using the position information (sixth information), positioninformation of a room corresponding to a type of a device iconrepresenting one target device and to a performance of the one targetdevice is determined. In addition, the determined position informationis transmitted to the home controller 100 (information apparatus) viathe network. Based on the transmitted position information, the deviceicon representing the one target device is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to the deviceicon on the display 101 of the home controller 100 (informationapparatus).

A specific displaying process of a device icon will now be described.

First, a specific displaying process of a device icon corresponding to alarge-sized television set will be described.

FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a large-sizedtelevision set. In the following description, a device to be newlyregistered is a large-sized television set and a performance (screensize) of the device to be newly registered is 65 v. In addition, atelevision set is not arranged in any of the rooms in the residenceprior to the television set being newly arranged. Furthermore, the roomtypes “living room”, “child room”, and “bedroom” are associated with thedevice type “television set”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from a device that has beennewly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300 receivesthe device new registration request shown in FIG. 100 from thetelevision set.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 90602 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 906100 (FIG. 102). Inthis case, since the device type 90602 is a television set, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts the three room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” from the reference table 906100.

The device control section 302 then calculates areas of the living room,the child room, and the bedroom corresponding to the television set tobe registered based on the vertex information 90800 and the roominformation 90900. For example, the area of the living room is 40 m²,the area of the child room is 14 m², and the area of the bedroom is 18m². In addition, the device control section 302 searches for a sizerange of a room corresponding to the performance of the television setto be registered in the reference table 90700. For example, a size rangeof a room corresponding to the 65 v size is 26 to 99 m². Subsequently,the device control section 302 searches for a room type corresponding toan area included in the searched size range among the calculated areasof the living room, the child room, and the bedroom. As a result, theliving room (40 m²) is extracted as the room type corresponding to anarea included in the searched size range (26 to 99 m²).

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the television set to benewly registered is already installed from the room types that are thesearch result. In this case, since a television set is not arranged inany of the rooms, only the living room that is the room type of thesearch result remains.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined as one, andthe device control section 302 searches for a room ID (A) and positioninformation (room coordinates) of the one remaining room type (livingroom). Subsequently, the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type (television set)indicating a type of the device icon, the one remaining room type(living room), the searched room ID, and position informationrepresenting coordinates of the one remaining room to the homecontroller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 91101 of the newlyregistered television set on the floor plan 500 based on the arrangementinformation. In this case, the device icon 91101 of the television setis displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to theliving room. In this manner, since a room corresponding to thetelevision set is uniquely determined, the device icon 91101 of thetelevision set is displayed in the living room.

Moreover, each of the one or more device icons displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each ofthe one or more device icons may include information indicating aperformance of a target device. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 108, “65v” that is information representing a screen size (65 v) of thetelevision set is displayed in a top right portion of the device icon91101 of the television set.

Next, a specific displaying process of a device icon corresponding to asmall-sized television set will be described.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when a device to be newly registered is a small-sized televisionset, and FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen ofa home controller when a device to be newly registered is a small-sizedtelevision set. In the following description, a device to be newlyregistered is a television set and a performance (screen size) of thedevice to be newly registered is 46 v. In addition, a television set isnot arranged in any of the rooms in the residence prior to thetelevision set being newly arranged. Furthermore, the room types “livingroom”, “child room”, and “bedroom” are associated with the device type“television set”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the device that has beennewly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300 receivesthe device new registration request shown in FIG. 109 from thetelevision set.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 90602 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 906100 (FIG. 102). Inthis case, since the device type 90602 is a television set, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts the three room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” from the reference table 906100.

The device control section 302 then calculates areas of the living room,the child room, and the bedroom corresponding to the television set tobe registered based on the vertex information 90800 and the roominformation 90900. For example, the area of the living room is 40 m²,the area of the child room is 14 m², and the area of the bedroom is 18m². In addition, the device control section 302 searches for a sizerange of a room corresponding to the performance of the television setto be registered in the reference table 90700. For example, a size rangeof a room corresponding to the 46 v size is 13 to 18 m². Subsequently,the device control section 302 searches for a room type corresponding toan area included in the searched size range among the calculated areasof the living room, the child room, and the bedroom. As a result, thechild room (14 m²) and the bedroom (18 m²) are extracted as room typescorresponding to an area included in the searched size range (13 to 18m²).

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the television set to benewly registered is already installed from the room types that are thesearch result. In this case, since a television set is not arranged inany of the rooms, the child room and the bedroom among the room typesthat are the search result remain.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined to be otherthan one and the device control section 302 transmits arrangementinformation including a device type (television set) indicating a typeof a device icon representing the one target device and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen to thehome controller 100. Moreover, the prescribed region on the displayscreen is a region outside the display region of the floor plan 500.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays the device icon 91101 of thenewly registered television set on the display 101 based on thearrangement information. In this case, the device icon 91101 of thetelevision set is displayed in a region outside the display region ofthe floor plan 500. As described above, since there are two or morerooms corresponding to the small-sized television set, the device icon91101 of the television set is displayed in a region outside the displayregion of the floor plan 500.

Next, a specific displaying process of a device icon corresponding to anair conditioner will be described.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when a device to be newly registered is an air conditioner, FIG.112 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table that associatesa device performance and a room size with each other when a device typeis an air conditioner, and FIG. 113 is a diagram showing an example of adisplay screen of a home controller when a device to be newly registeredis an air conditioner. In the following description, a device to benewly registered is an air conditioner and a performance (maximumoutput) of the device to be newly registered is 2.2 kW. In addition, anair conditioner is not arranged in any of the rooms in the residenceprior to the air conditioner being newly arranged. Furthermore, the roomtypes “living room”, “child room”, and “bedroom” are associated with thedevice type “air conditioner”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the device that has beennewly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300 receivesthe device new registration request shown in FIG. 111 from the airconditioner.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 90602 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 906100 (FIG. 102). Inthis case, since the device type 90602 is an air conditioner, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts the three room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” from the reference table 906100.

The device control section 302 then calculates areas of the living room,the child room, and the bedroom corresponding to the air conditioner tobe registered based on the vertex information 90800 and the roominformation 90900. For example, the area of the living room is 40 m²,the area of the child room is 14 m², and the area of the bedroom is 18m². In addition, the device control section 302 searches for a sizerange of a room corresponding to the performance of the air conditionerto be registered in the reference table 91500.

As shown in FIG. 112, a performance ID 91501 for identifying aperformance of a device, a performance 91502 representing theperformance of the device, a smallest room size 91503, and a largestroom size 91504 are associated with each other. Moreover, theperformance shown in FIG. 112 represents the performance of an airconditioner and, more specifically, a maximum output.

For example, a smallest room size “10 m²” and a largest room size “15m²” are associated with the performance “2.2 kW”, a smallest room size“12 m²” and a largest room size “17 m²” are associated with theperformance “2.5 kW”, a smallest room size “13 m²” and a largest roomsize “20 m” are associated with the performance “2.8 kW”, and a smallestroom size “17 m²” and a largest room size “25 m²” are associated withthe performance “3.6 kW”.

In other words, a size range of 10 to 15 m² is associated with theperformance “2.2 kW” and a size range of 12 to 17 m² is associated withthe performance “2.5 kW”.

For example, a size range of a room corresponding to 2.2 kW is 10 to 15m². Subsequently, the device control section 302 searches for a roomtype corresponding to an area included in the searched size range amongthe calculated areas of the living room, the child room, and thebedroom. As a result, the child room (14 m²) is extracted as the roomtype corresponding to an area included in the searched size range (10 to15 m²).

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the air conditioner to benewly registered is already installed from the room types that are thesearch result. In this case, since an air conditioner is not arranged inany of the rooms, only the child room that is a room type that is thesearch result remains.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined as one, andthe device control section 302 searches for a room ID (G) and positioninformation (room coordinates) of the one remaining room type (childroom). Subsequently, the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type (air conditioner)indicating a type of the device icon, the one remaining room type (childroom), the searched room ID, and position information representingcoordinates of the one remaining room to the home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 91601 of the newlyregistered air conditioner on the floor plan 500 based on thearrangement information. In this case, the device icon 91601 of the airconditioner is displayed in a region on the display screen correspondingto the child room. In this manner, since a room corresponding to the airconditioner is uniquely determined, the device icon 91101 of the airconditioner is displayed in the child room.

Next, a specific displaying process of a device icon corresponding to anillumination device will be described.

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when devices to be newly registered are two illuminationdevices, FIG. 115 is a diagram showing an example of a reference tablethat associates a device performance and a room size with each otherwhen a device type is an illumination device, and FIG. 116 is a diagramshowing an example of a display screen of a home controller when devicesto be newly registered are two illumination devices. In the followingdescription, devices to be newly registered are two illumination devicesand performances (power consumption) of the devices to be newlyregistered are 100 W and 160 W, respectively. In addition, anillumination device is not arranged in any of the rooms in the residenceprior to the two illumination devices being newly arranged. Furthermore,the room types “living room”, “child room”, and “bedroom” are associatedwith the device type “illumination device”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the device that has beennewly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300 receivesthe two device new registration requests shown in FIG. 114 from the twoillumination devices.

Moreover, when device new registration requests are received from aplurality of devices of a same type, the device control section 302individually processes each device.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 90602 included in each received devicenew registration request in the reference table 906100. In this case,since the device type 90602 is an illumination device, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts the three room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” from the reference table 906100.

The device control section 302 then calculates areas of the living room,the child room, and the bedroom corresponding to the illumination deviceto be registered based on the vertex information 90800 and the roominformation 90900. For example, the area of the living room is 40 m²,the area of the child room is 14 m², and the area of the bedroom is 18m². In addition, the device control section 302 searches for a sizerange of a room corresponding to the performance of the illuminationdevice to be registered in the reference table 91800 (FIG. 115).

As shown in FIG. 115, a performance ID 91801 for identifying aperformance of a device, a performance 91802 representing theperformance of the device, a smallest room size 91803, and a largestroom size 91804 are associated with each other. Moreover, theperformance shown in FIG. 115 represents the performance of anillumination device and, more specifically, power consumption. Inaddition, while the performance of an illumination device according tothe present embodiment is expressed by power consumption, the presentdisclosure is not particularly limited thereto and the performance of anillumination device may instead be expressed by maximum illuminance.

For example, a smallest room size “0 m²” and a largest room size “7 m²”are associated with the performance “40 W”, a smallest room size “7 m²”and a largest room size “10 m²” are associated with the performance “62W”, a smallest room size “10 m²” and a largest room size “13 m²” areassociated with the performance “72 W”, and a smallest room size “13 m²”and a largest room size “17 m²” are associated with the performance “100W”.

In other words, a size range of 0 to 7 m² is associated with theperformance “40 W” and a size range of 7 to 10 m² is associated with theperformance “62 W”.

For example, a size range of a room corresponding to 100 W is 13 to 17m² and a size range of a room corresponding to 160 W is 17 to 23 m².Subsequently, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to an area included in the searched size range among thecalculated areas of the living room, the child room, and the bedroom. Asa result, the child room (14 m²) is extracted as the searched room typecorresponding to an area included in the size range (13 to 17 m²) of aroom corresponding to 100 W, and the bedroom (18 m²) is extracted as thesearched room type corresponding to an area included in the size range(17 to 23 m²) of a room corresponding to 160 W.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the illumination device tobe newly registered is already installed from the room types that arethe search result. In this case, since an illumination device is notarranged in any of the rooms, the child room that is a room type of thesearch result remains with respect to the 100 W illumination device andthe bedroom that is a room type of the search result remains withrespect to the 160 W illumination device.

Therefore, for each illumination device, the number of remaining roomtypes is determined as one, and the device control section 302 searchesfor a room ID (G) and position information (room coordinates) of the oneremaining room type (child room) for the 100 W illumination device. Inaddition, for the 160 W illumination device, the device control section302 searches for a room ID (B) and position information (roomcoordinates) of the one remaining room type (bedroom). Subsequently, thedevice control section 302 transmits first arrangement informationincluding a device type (100 W illumination device) indicating a type ofthe device icon, the one remaining room type (child room), the searchedroom ID, and position information representing coordinates of the oneremaining room and second arrangement information including a devicetype (160 W illumination device) indicating a type of the device icon,the one remaining room type (bedroom), the searched room ID, andposition information representing coordinates of the one remaining roomto the home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays device icons 91901 and 91902 ofthe two newly registered illumination devices on the floor plan 500based on the arrangement information. In this case, the device icon91901 of one illumination device is displayed in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to the child room and the device icon 91902 of theother illumination device is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the bedroom. In this manner, since rooms correspondingto the two illumination devices are respectively uniquely determined,the device icons 91901 and 91902 of the two illumination devices arerespectively displayed in the child room and the bedroom.

As described above, device new registration requests (registrationnotification information) representing that two or more target devicesamong one or more target devices have been newly registered in the homecontrol system (information management system) are received from the twoor more target devices via the network. When it is determined that thetypes of two or more device icons representing each of the two or moretarget devices are the same based on device types (first information),an attribute of a room corresponding to each of the two or more deviceicons is determined in accordance with performance of each of the two ormore target devices based on room types (second information).Subsequently, for each of the two or more device icons, a device type(fourth information) indicating a type of each of the two or more deviceicons and a room type (fifth information) indicating an attribute ofeach room are transmitted via the network to the home controller 100(information apparatus). In addition, based on the device type (fourthinformation) and the room type (fifth information), the two or moredevice icons are displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the two or moredevice icons on the display 101 of the home controller 100 (informationapparatus).

Next, an initial arrangement deciding process for deciding arrangementpositions of a plurality of device icons corresponding to a plurality ofdevices of a same type will be described.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess for deciding arrangement positions of a plurality of deviceicons corresponding to a plurality of devices of a same type.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not thedevice new registration request from the device 200 has been received(S92001).

At this point, when it is determined that the device new registrationrequest from the device 200 has not been received (NO in S92001), theprocess is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the device newregistration request from the device 200 has been received (YES inS92001), the device control section 302 determines whether or not thereare two or more devices to be registered and that the devices are of thesame type (S92002). At this point, when it is determined that there isone device to be registered or that there are two or more devices to beregistered but the devices are not of the same type (NO in S92002), atransition is made to the process of step S90502 in FIG. 101.Subsequently, the process of step S90502 and thereafter is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there are two or moredevices to be registered and that the devices are of the same type (YESin S92002), the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type of the two or more devices 200 to beregistered (S92003). The device control section 302 searches for a roomtype corresponding to the device type 90602 included in the receiveddevice new registration request in the reference table 906100.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room type matching atotal size corresponding to the performances of the two or more devicesto be registered from the room types that are search results (S92004).For example, when the devices to be registered are a 100 W illuminationdevice and a 160 W illumination device, a reference table 91800 shown inFIG. 115 is used. In this case, a total size corresponding toperformances of the 100 W illumination device and the 160 W illuminationdevice are expressed by a size (30 m²) combining a smallest room size(13 m²) corresponding to 100 W and a smallest room size (17 m²)corresponding to 160 W and a size (40 m²) combining a largest room size(17 m²) corresponding to 100 W and a largest room size (23 m²)corresponding to 160 W. In other words, a size range of 30 to 40 m² isassociated with the performances of the 100 W illumination device andthe 160 W illumination device.

The device control section 302 calculates an area of a room typecorresponding to a device type of the two or more devices to beregistered based on the vertex information 90800 and the roominformation 90900. In addition, the device control section 302 searchesfor a size range representing a range between a sum of smallest sizesand a sum of largest sizes corresponding to each performance of the twoor more devices to be registered in a reference table. Subsequently, thedevice control section 302 searches for a room type corresponding to anarea included in the searched size range among the calculated areas ofroom types.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the device 200 to be newlyregistered is already installed from the room types that are the searchresult (S92005).

The device control section 302 then determines the number of remainingroom types (S92006). In this case, when the number of remaining roomtypes is determined to be other than one or, in other words, when thenumber of remaining room types is determined to be zero or two or more(“other than one” in S92006), the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type indicating a type ofdevice icons representing the two or more devices and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen(S92007).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remainingroom types is one (“one” in S92006), the device control section 302searches for a room ID and position information of the one remainingroom type and transmits arrangement information including a device typeindicating a type of the device icon, a room type of a correspondingroom, a room ID of the corresponding room, and position informationrepresenting a position of the corresponding room on the floor plan tothe home controller 100 (S92008).

As described above, device new registration requests (registrationnotification information) representing that two or more target devicesamong one or more target devices have been newly registered in the homecontrol system (information management system) are received from the twoor more target devices via the network. When it is determined that thetypes of two or more device icons representing each of the two or moretarget devices are the same based on device types (first information), asum of respective performances of the two or more device icons isdetermined based on the second information and an attribute of one roomwith a size corresponding to the determined sum of performances isdetermined. Subsequently, a device type (fourth information) indicatinga type of the two or more device icons and a room type (fifthinformation) indicating an attribute of the one room are transmitted viathe network to the home controller 100 (information apparatus). Inaddition, based on the device type (fourth information) and the roomtype (fifth information), the two or more device icons are displayed ina region on the display screen corresponding to the one room on thedisplay 101 of the home controller 100 (information apparatus).

Next, a specific displaying process of two or more device iconscorresponding to two or more illumination devices will be described.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when devices to be newly registered are two illuminationdevices, and FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a displayscreen of a home controller when devices to be newly registered are twoillumination devices. In the following description, devices to be newlyregistered are two illumination devices and performances (powerconsumption) of the devices to be newly registered are 100 W and 160 W,respectively. In addition, an illumination device is not arranged in anyof the rooms in the residence prior to the two illumination devicesbeing newly arranged. Furthermore, the room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” are associated with the device type “illuminationdevice”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the device that has beennewly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300 receivesthe device new registration requests shown in FIG. 118 from one of thetwo illumination devices. When two or more devices are to be newlyregistered, one device among the two or more devices transmits a devicenew registration request summarizing devices types, performances, andthe like of all devices. Moreover, when the device new registrationrequest is to be transmitted from the device 200 to the server 300 viathe home controller 100, the home controller 100 may transmit a devicenew registration request summarizing devices types, performances, andthe like of the two or more devices.

Next, the device control section 302 determines whether or not there aretwo or more devices to be registered and that the devices are of thesame type. When there are two or more devices of the same type includedin the device new registration request, the device control section 302determines that there are two or more devices to be registered and thatthe devices are of the same type. Moreover, when it is determined thatthere are two or more devices to be registered but the devices are notof the same type, the device control section 302 individually processeseach device.

Since the device new registration request shown in FIG. 118 includesinformation related to two illumination devices, the device controlsection 302 determines that there are two or more devices to beregistered and that the devices are of the same type.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 90602 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 906100. In this case,since the device type 90602 is an illumination device, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts the three room types “living room”, “childroom”, and “bedroom” from the reference table 906100.

The device control section 302 then calculates areas of the living room,the child room, and the bedroom corresponding to the two illuminationdevices to be registered based on the vertex information 90800 and theroom information 90900. For example, the area of the living room is 40m², the area of the child room is 14 m², and the area of the bedroom is18 m². In addition, the device control section 302 searches for a sizerange corresponding to the performances of the two illumination devicesto be registered in the reference table 91800 (FIG. 115).

For example, a size range corresponding to 100 W is 13 to 17 m² and asize range corresponding to 160 W is 17 to 23 m². Therefore, a sizerange combining the size range corresponding to 100 W with the sizerange corresponding to 160 W is 30 to 40 m². Subsequently, the devicecontrol section 302 searches for a room type corresponding to an areaincluded in the searched size range among the calculated areas of theliving room, the child room, and the bedroom. As a result, the livingroom (40 m²) is extracted as the room type corresponding to an areaincluded in the searched size range (30 to 40 m²) corresponding to thetwo illumination devices.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room type correspondingto a room in which a device of a same type as the two illuminationdevices to be newly registered is already installed from the room typesthat are the search result. In this case, since an illumination deviceis not arranged in any of the rooms, the living room that is the roomtype of the search result remains.

Therefore, the number of remaining room types is determined as one, andthe device control section 302 searches for a room ID (A) and positioninformation (room coordinates) of the one remaining room type (livingroom). Subsequently, the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including device types (100 W and 160 Willumination devices) indicating the types of the two device icons, theone remaining room type (living room), the searched room ID, andposition information representing coordinates of the one remaining roomto the home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays device icons 91901 and 91902 ofthe two newly registered illumination devices on the floor plan 500based on the arrangement information. In this case, the device icons91901 and 91902 of the two illumination devices are both displayed in aregion on the display screen corresponding to the living room. In thismanner, since rooms corresponding to the two illumination devices arerespectively uniquely determined, the device icons 91901 and 91902 ofthe two illumination devices are respectively displayed in the livingroom.

While a bird's eye view representing positions and shapes of roomsconstituting each floor in a planar manner is adopted as the floor plan500 in the description given above, the present embodiment is notlimited thereto and a diagram showing what kind of and how many roomsare on each floor in a simplified manner may also be adopted as a floorplan.

Hereinafter, a different pattern of a floor plan will be specificallydescribed. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern. On the floor plan 5200, one room constituting onefloor is represented by one square block and respective rooms on onefloor are arranged in a matrix pattern. In addition, sizes of therespective blocks are the same, and a name and an area of a room aredescribed in each block.

For example, the floor plan 5200 includes the respective rooms of aliving room, a kitchen, a dining room, a bathroom, a washroom, a toilet,a bedroom, and a child room. In addition, a device icon 501 of anactually arranged device 200 is displayed in each room. For example, thedevice icon 501 of an illumination device displayed in the living roomsignifies that an illumination device is installed in the living room.

Even when such a floor plan 5200 is displayed, a device icon of a deviceto be newly registered can be displayed in the same manner as describedearlier.

FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a device to be newly registered on the floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern.

On the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 121, a display method of a deviceicon when a device is to be newly registered is almost the same as thedisplay method of a device icon on the floor plan 500 described earlier.A difference is that an area of each room is stored in advance inassociation to each room. When calculating a size of each room in stepS90503 in FIG. 101, the device control section 302 reads out andutilizes an area stored in advance instead of calculating an area basedon vertex coordinates or the like.

In FIG. 121, a device icon 91101 of a newly registered television set isdisplayed on the floor plan 5200. A performance of the newly registeredtelevision set is 65 v. Therefore, the device icon 91101 of the newlyregistered television set is displayed in a region corresponding to theliving room of which size is in accordance with the performance of thenewly registered television set.

While an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to a deviceto be newly registered is decided by the server 300 in the descriptiongiven above, the present disclosure is not particularly limited theretoand the arrangement position may be decided by the home controller 100.A process for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered by the home controller100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 122.

FIG. 122 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

When a device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S90401).

Next, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request from the device 200 andperforms an initial arrangement deciding process for deciding anarrangement position on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding tothe device 200 to be newly registered (S90402). Moreover, the initialarrangement deciding process by the home controller 100 will bedescribed later.

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S90404).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S92501). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300. In addition, when the arrangementinformation is not transmitted to the server 300, the home controlsystem need not include the server 300.

The initial arrangement deciding process shown in FIG. 122 will now bedescribed in greater detail.

FIG. 123 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by the home controller 100.

Since the process performed in steps S92501 to S92505 shown in FIG. 123is the same as the process performed in steps S90501 to S90505 shown inFIG. 101, a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the devicemanagement section 105 of the home controller 100 executes the processof steps S92501 to S92505 in place of the device control section 302 ofthe server 300. Furthermore, the home controller 100 stores thereference table 906100 (FIG. 102), the reference table 90700 (FIG. 104),the reference table 91500 (FIG. 112), the reference table 91800 (FIG.115), the room information 90900 (FIG. 106), and the vertex information90800 (FIG. 105).

When the number of remaining room types is determined to be other thanone or, in other words, when the number of remaining room types isdetermined to be zero or two or more (“other than one” in S92505), thedevice management section 105 decides a device type indicating a type ofa device icon representing one target device and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen(S92506).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remainingroom types is one (“one” in S92505), the device management section 105searches for a room ID and position information of the one remainingroom type and decides a device type indicating a type of the deviceicon, a room type of a corresponding room, a room ID of thecorresponding room, and position information representing a position ofthe corresponding room on the floor plan (S92507).

Next, the display control section 103 displays a device iconcorresponding to the newly registered device 200 and updates the displayscreen (S92508). At this point, when it is determined that the number ofremaining room types is other than one, the display control section 103displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200outside the floor plan based on the device type and display regioninformation and updates the display screen. On the other hand, when itis determined that the number of remaining room types is one, thedisplay control section 103 displays a device icon corresponding to thenewly registered device 200 on the floor plan based on the decideddevice type, room type, room ID, and position information, and updatesthe display screen.

Moreover, the display control section 103 displays a display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500 including one or more rooms on thedisplay 101. In addition, using one or two or more memories that manage,in association with each other, a device type (first information)indicating types of one or more device icons representing each of one ormore target devices, performance information (second information)indicating a performance of a target device corresponding to the one ormore device icons, and a room type (third information) indicating anattribute of each of the one or more rooms, the display control section103 displays the one or more device icons in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one ormore device icons in accordance with the types of the one or more deviceicons and the performances of the target device corresponding to the oneor more device icons.

Furthermore, when selection of any of the one or more device icons issensed in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in thefloor plan 500, the display control section 103 displays a controlscreen for at least any of operation and state confirmation of a targetdevice corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500. Subsequently, based on an operation onthe control screen, the communication control section 107 outputs acontrol command for at least any of the operation and the stateconfirmation of the target device corresponding to the selected deviceicon to the network.

In addition, when the one or more device icons include two or moredevice icons of the same type, based on the performance information(second information), the display control section 103 may display eachof the two or more device icons of the same type in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room with a size corresponding to aperformance of a target device that corresponds to each of the two ormore device icons of the same type in accordance with the performance ofthe target device corresponding to each of the two or more device iconsof the same type.

Furthermore, when it is determined that two or more device icons of thesame type are included in the one or more device icons based on thedevice type (first information), the display control section 103 maydetermine a room with a size corresponding to a performance of a targetdevice corresponding to each of the two or more device icons of the sametype and display each of the two or more device icons of the same typein a region on the display screen corresponding to each determined roombased on the performance information (second information) and the roomtype (third information).

In addition, the one or two or more memories may further manage positioninformation (fourth information) of each of one or more rooms on thefloor plan 500. The display control section 103 may determine a regioncorresponding to each of the one or more rooms using the positioninformation (fourth information). Furthermore, the display controlsection 103 may display one or more device icons in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of theone or more device icons in accordance with the types of the one or moredevice icons and a performance of a target device corresponding to theone or more device icons.

In addition, when the one or more device icons include two or moredevice icons of the same type, the display control section 103 maydetermine a sum of performances of target devices corresponding to atleast two device icons among the two or more device icons of the sametype based on the performance information (second information).Furthermore, in accordance with the determined sum of performances, thedisplay control section 103 may display each of the at least two deviceicons among the two or more device icons of the same type in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a room with a size corresponding tothe calculated sum of performances.

In addition, when it is determined that two or more device icons of thesame type are included in the one or more device icons based on thedevice type (first information), the display control section 103 maydetermine a sum of performances of target devices corresponding to atleast two device icons among the two or more device icons of the sametype based on the performance information (second information).Furthermore, the display control section 103 may determine a room with asize corresponding to the performances of target devices correspondingto at least two device icons among the two or more device icons of thesame type based on the calculated sum of performances and the room type(third information). Moreover, the display control section 103 maydisplay each of the at least two device icons among the two or moredevice icons of the same type in a region on the display screencorresponding to the determined room.

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the server 300 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 99, thepresent disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and the device200 may transmit a device new registration request to the homecontroller 100 and the home controller 100 may transmit a devicearrangement request for requesting that a display position of a deviceicon corresponding to a newly registered device be decided to the server300. A process for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered by the server 300 whenthe device 200 transmits a device new registration request to the homecontroller 100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 124.

FIG. 124 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the server300 for deciding an arrangement position of a device icon correspondingto a device to be newly registered when the device 200 transmits adevice new registration request to the home controller 100.

When a device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S90401).In this case, the device new registration request includes a device IDand a device type.

Next, the communication control section 107 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request transmitted by the device200 and transmits a device arrangement request for requesting that adisplay position of a device icon corresponding to a newly registereddevice be decided to the server 300 (S92601). In this case, the devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype. The communication control section 107 creates a device arrangementrequest in which a residence ID is added to the device ID and the devicetype included in the received device new registration request andtransmits the device arrangement request.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice arrangement request from the device 200 and performs an initialarrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangement position on thefloor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device 200 to be newlyregistered (S90402). Moreover, the initial arrangement deciding processis as described earlier.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S90403).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S90404).

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the home controller 100 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG.122, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and thedevice 200 may transmit a device new registration request to the server300 and the server 300 may transmit a device arrangement request forrequesting that a display position of a device icon corresponding to anewly registered device be decided to the home controller 100. A processfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered by the home controller 100 when the device200 transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 willnow be described with reference to FIG. 125.

FIG. 125 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the server 300 (S90401). The devicenew registration request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and adevice type.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and transmits adevice arrangement request for requesting that a display position of adevice icon corresponding to a newly registered device be decided to thehome controller 100 (S92701). At this point, the device control section302 stores the newly registered device in a device list. The devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype.

Next, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100receives the device arrangement request from the server 300 and performsan initial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S90402). Moreover, the initial arrangementdeciding process is as described earlier.

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S90404).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S92501). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300.

(Device icon arranging process 3) Next, a device icon arranging process3 in which a device icon is automatically arranged on a floor plan willbe described.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a basic screen that isdisplayed on the display 101 of the home controller 100, and FIG. 127 isa diagram showing a configuration of a display state of the devicecontrol screen 502 of the home controller 100.

On the basic screen shown in FIG. 126, when the touch panel controlsection 102 senses that the user has selected the device icon 501, thedisplay control section 103 displays the device control screen 502corresponding to the selected device icon 501 on the display 101. Thedevice control screen 502 is unique to each device 200 and is a controlscreen for controlling the device 200 or performing state confirmationof the device 200. For example, FIG. 127 shows an example where a deviceicon of an air conditioner has been selected by the user, in which casea temperature setting or an air flow direction of the air conditioner iscontrolled using the device control screen 502 of the air conditioner.Moreover, in FIG. 127, while a device icon is not arranged on thedisplay 101, a device icon may be displayed outside of a display regionof the device control screen 502 as shown in FIGS. 11 to 16.

Next, a flow of a process for newly registering a device 200 in a homecontrol system (information management system) will be described withreference to the drawings. The home control system connects to a networkwhich controls one or more target devices managed in association with asame building ID, and manages information of the one or more targetdevices.

FIG. 128 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying processfor displaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

First, when the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room insidethe house, the communication control section 217 of the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 (S110301).

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when a microwave oven is to be newlyregistered. As shown in FIG. 129, the device new registration requestincludes a residence ID 110500 for identifying a residence in which thedevice 200 is arranged, a device ID 110501 for identifying the device200, and a device type 110502 for identifying a type of the device 200.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 inquiresa residence ID to the home controller 100, acquires the residence IDfrom the home controller 100, and creates a device new registrationrequest.

Moreover, while the communication control section 217 of the device 200acquires the residence ID from the home controller 100 in the presentembodiment, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto.When the device 200 and the server 300 are connected to each other via agateway installed in the home, the gateway may provide the residence ID.Specifically, the communication control section 217 of the device 200may transmit a device new registration request including the device ID70501 and the device type 70502, and the gateway may include theresidence ID in the device new registration request from the device 200and transmit the device new registration request to the server 300.Alternatively, the device 200 may accept input of a residence ID by theuser.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and performs aninitial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S110302). Moreover, the initial arrangementdeciding process by the server 300 will be described later.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S110303).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S110304).

The initial arrangement deciding process shown in FIG. 128 will now bedescribed in greater detail.

FIG. 130 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by the server 300.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not thedevice new registration request from the device 200 has been received(S110401). The server 300 receives, from one target device among the oneor more target devices via the network, a device new registrationrequest (registration notification information) representing that theone target device has been newly registered in the home control system(information management system).

At this point, when it is determined that the device new registrationrequest from the device 200 has not been received (NO in S110401), theprocess is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the device newregistration request from the device 200 has been received (YES inS110401), the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type of the device 200 to be registered(S110402). In this case, the storage section 304 of the server 300stores, in advance, a reference table that associates a device type anda room type with each other.

FIG. 131 is a diagram showing an example of a reference table 110600that associates a device type 110601 and a room type 110602 with eachother. As shown in FIG. 131, the device type 110601 and the room type110602 are associated with each other. The storage section 304 isconstituted by one memory and manages the device type 110601 (firstinformation) indicating types of one or more device icons representingthe one or more target devices and the room type 110602 (secondinformation) indicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms inassociation with each other. For example, the room type “kitchen” isassociated with the device type “refrigerator”, the room type “toilet”is associated with the device type “toilet seat apparatus”, the roomtypes “living room” and “bedroom” are associated with the device type“air conditioner”, and the room types “living room”, “child room”, and“bedroom” are associated with the device type “television set”.

In the example shown in FIG. 131, the refrigerator and the toilet seatapparatus are respectively constituted by one tuple, the air conditioneris constituted by two tuples, and the television set is constituted bythree tuples. Moreover, in the case of a device type such as ahumidifier for which a room where the device type is arranged is notspecified, a room type need not be associated. Specifically, the storagesection 304 does not store data that associates the device type“humidifier” with a room type.

The device control section 302 searches for a room type corresponding tothe device type 110502 included in the received device new registrationrequest in the reference table 110600.

Moreover, while FIG. 131 shows one memory managing a device type and aroom type in association with each other, the present disclosure is notparticularly limited thereto and two or more memories may manage adevice type and a room type in association with each other.

FIGS. 132A to 132C are diagrams showing an example in which device typesand room types are managed by three reference tables. FIG. 132A is adiagram showing an example of a first reference table 1106001 thatassociates a device ID 1106011 and a device type name 1106012 with eachother, FIG. 132B is a diagram showing an example of a second referencetable 1106002 that associates a room ID 1106013 and a room type name1106014 with each other, and FIG. 132C is a diagram showing an exampleof a third reference table 1106003 that associates a device ID 1106015and a room ID 1106016 with each other.

1 The first reference table 1106001 associates the device ID 1106011 foridentifying the device 200 and the device type name 1106012 representingthe name of the type of the device 200 with each other. The secondreference table 1106002 associates the room ID 1106013 for identifying aroom and the room type name 1106014 representing the name of anattribute of the room with each other. The third reference table 1106003associates the device ID 1106015 for identifying the device 200 and theroom ID 1106016 for identifying a room with each other. The firstreference table 1106001, the second reference table 1106002, and thethird reference table 1106003 may be respectively stored in differentmemories.

The device control section 302 searches for a room ID corresponding tothe device ID 110501 included in the received device new registrationrequest in the third reference table 1106003 and searches for a roomtype name corresponding to the searched room ID in the second referencetable 1106002.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a same room type asthe room type that is the search result in currently registered roominformation (S110403).

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of room information 111000. Theroom information 111000 includes a residence ID 111004, a room ID111001, a room type 111002, and room coordinates 111003. The residenceID 111004 is an identifier for identifying a residence. The room ID111001 is an identifier for identifying a room on the floor plan 500.The room type 111002 indicates a type of the room. The room coordinates111003 are expressed by a set of vertex IDs and decide an area of a roomon the floor plan 500. For example, a room of which room ID is C is abathroom and indicates a region formed by connecting vertex IDs in asequence of A, B, G and F on the floor plan 500.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example of the vertex information110910. As shown in FIG. 134, the vertex information 110910 includes aresidence ID 110913, a vertex ID 110911, and vertex coordinates 110912.The residence ID 110913 is an identifier of a residence. The vertex ID110911 is an identifier for identifying a vertex on the floor plan 500.The vertex coordinates 110912 are coordinates expressed by a (Xcoordinate, Y coordinate, floor number) format and indicate a positionof a vertex such as a partition line represented on the floor plan 500.For example, since a vertex of which vertex ID is B has vertexcoordinates expressed as (X20, Y0, Z1), the vertex represents a positionon the first floor (floor 1) of which X coordinate is 20 and Ycoordinate is 0.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between eachvertex registered in the vertex information 110910 and the floor plan500. Note that, in FIG. 135, a top left vertex of the floor plan 500 isassumed to be an origin (both X coordinate and Y coordinate are 0). Forexample, since vertex coordinates of a vertex with a vertex ID of A areexpressed as (X0, Y0, Z1), the vertex is positioned on the origin. Inaddition, since vertex coordinates of a vertex with a vertex ID of B areexpressed as (X20, Y0, Z1), the vertex is positioned at a top rightvertex of the bathroom.

The device control section 302 searches for a same room type as the roomtype that is the search result in currently registered room information111000.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to a room in which a device of a type associated with thetype of the device 200 to be newly registered is already installed amongthe room types that are the search result (S110404).

FIG. 136 is a diagram showing an example of a device type referencetable 110700 that is managed by a server.

The device type reference table 110700 shown in FIG. 136 associates,with each other, a first device type 110701 and a second device type110702 that is in a relationship of being displayed in a same room as aroom in which a device icon of the first device type is displayed. Forexample, a second device type “microwave oven” is associated with afirst device type “refrigerator”, a second device type “inductioncooker” is associated with the first device type “refrigerator”, and asecond device type “content reproducing machine” is associated with afirst device type “television set”. In the example shown in FIG. 136,the microwave oven, the induction cooker, and the content reproducingmachine are respectively constituted by one tuple.

The microwave oven and the refrigerator are likely to be arranged in asame room (for example, the kitchen), the induction cooker and therefrigerator are likely to be arranged in a same room (for example, thekitchen), and the content reproducing machine and the television set arelikely to be arranged in a same room (for example, the living room).Therefore, when a device to be newly registered is a microwave oven, byidentifying a room in which is currently arranged a refrigerator that islikely to be arranged together with the microwave oven, a room in whichthe microwave oven is to be arranged can be identified.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a device list 110800 that is managed bythe server 300. As shown in FIG. 137, the device list 110800 includes aresidence ID 110806, a device ID 110801, a device type 110802, a modelnumber 110803, a room ID 110804, and an arrangement 110805.

The residence ID 110806 is an identifier of a residence. The device ID110801 is an identifier of the device 200. The device type 110802indicates a type of the device 200. The model number 110803 indicates amodel number of the device 200. The room ID 110804 is an identifier of aroom in which the device 200 is installed. The arrangement 110805 iscoordinates which are expressed by an (X coordinate, Y coordinate, floornumber) format and indicates an arrangement position on the floor plan500 of the device icon 501 corresponding to the device 200. Moreover,the device list 110800 may include capability information 4705 and acontrol command transmission destination 4706 as shown in FIG. 34.Alternatively, the device list 110800 may include a room typerepresenting an attribute of a room in which the device 200 is arranged.

The device control section 302 refers to the device type reference table110700 and determines whether or not a device type of the device 200 tobe newly registered is the second device type. When it is determinedthat the device type of the device 200 to be newly registered is thesecond device type, the device control section 302 identifies the firstdevice type that is associated with the second device type.Subsequently, the device control section 302 refers to the device list110800, identifies a room ID corresponding to a room in which a deviceof the identified first device type is already being installed, andextracts a room type corresponding to the identified room ID from theroom types that are the search result. Moreover, when the device type ofthe device 200 to be newly registered is not the second device type, thedevice control section 302 does not identify the first device type anddoes not extract a room type from room types that are the search result.

Next, the device control section 302 determines the number of room typesthat are the search result (S110405). At this point, when it isdetermined that the number of room types that are the search result istwo or more (“two or more” in S110405), the device control section 302searches for a room type corresponding to a room in which is arranged adevice with highest use frequency among the room types that are thesearch result (S110406).

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of a use frequency managementtable 110900 that is managed by the server 300. As shown in FIG. 138,the use frequency management table 110900 includes a residence ID110905, a device ID 110901, a registration date 110902, the number oftimes power has been turned on 110903, and a viewing time 110904. Theuse frequency management table 110900 shown in FIG. 138 indicates a usefrequency of a television set.

The device control section 302 calculates a use frequency of a devicecorresponding to a device type that is associated with the device typeof the device 200 to be newly registered. The device control section 302calculates the use frequency of the device by dividing the number oftimes power has been turned on by the number of days from registrationto the present. Subsequently, the device control section 302 searchesfor a room type corresponding to a room in which is arranged a devicewith highest calculated use frequency among the room types that are thesearch result.

Alternatively, the device control section 302 may calculate the usefrequency of the device by dividing the viewing time by the number ofdays from registration to the present.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of room typesthat are the search result is one (“one” in S110405) or when a room typecorresponding to a room in which is arranged a device with highest usefrequency is searched in step S110406, the device control section 302transmits arrangement information including a device type indicating atype of the device icon, a room type of a corresponding room, a room IDof the corresponding room, and position information representing aposition of the corresponding room on the floor plan to the homecontroller 100 (S110407).

Moreover, in a similar manner to the room coordinates 111003, positioninformation is expressed by a set of vertex IDs 110911 and indicates aroom on the floor plan 500 in which is displayed a device icon 501corresponding to the device 200 to be newly registered. In addition, forexample, a position that does not overlap with other device icons in theroom is decided as an arrangement position of the device icon 501corresponding to the device 200 to be newly registered.

When it is determined that the number of room types that is the searchresult is one, the device control section 302 searches for a room ID andposition information of the one room type that is the search result andtransmits arrangement information including a device type indicating atype of the device icon, the one room type that is the search result,the searched room ID, and position information representing coordinatesof the one room type that is the search result to the home controller100.

In addition, when a room type corresponding to a room in which isarranged a device with highest use frequency is searched in stepS110406, the device control section 302 transmits arrangementinformation including a device type indicating a type of the deviceicon, a room type corresponding to the room in which is arranged thedevice with highest use frequency, a room ID of the room in which isarranged the device with highest use frequency, and position informationrepresenting a position of the room in which is arranged the device withhighest use frequency to the home controller 100.

On the other hand, when the number of room types that are the searchresult is determined to be zero (“zero” in S110405), the device controlsection 302 transmits arrangement information including a device typeindicating a type of a device icon representing the device to be newlyregistered and display region information indicating a prescribed regionon the display screen to the home controller 100 (S110408).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

As described above, using one or two or more memories that manage, inassociation with each other, a device type (first information)indicating types of one or more device icons representing each of one ormore target devices, a room type (second information) indicating anattribute of each of the one or more rooms included in a display screenrepresenting a floor plan of a building indicated by a residence ID(building ID), and a device type reference table (third information)indicating a device icon of a second device type (second type) that isin a relationship of being displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as a device icon of a first device type(first type) among types of the one or more device icons, whether or notone device icon is a device icon of the second device type (second type)is determined based on the received device new registration request(registration notification information). Subsequently, when the onedevice icon is determined as a device icon of the second device type(second type), an attribute of a room corresponding to a device icon ofa first device type (first type) is determined.

In addition, a device type (fourth information) indicating a type of theone device icon and a room type (fifth information) indicating thedetermined attribute of the room are transmitted via the network to thehome controller 100 (information apparatus) which is managed inassociation with the same residence ID (building ID) and which displaysa display screen representing the floor plan 500 on the display 101.Based on the device type (fourth information) and the room type (fifthinformation), the one device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a same room as the room in which thedevice icon of the first device type (first type) is displayed on thedisplay 101 of the home controller 100 (information apparatus).

Furthermore, when selection of any of the one or more device icons issensed in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in thefloor plan 500, the home controller 100 (information apparatus) displaysa control screen for at least any of operation and state confirmation ofa target device corresponding to the selected device icon on the displayscreen representing the floor plan 500. Subsequently, based on anoperation on the control screen, a control command for at least any ofthe operation and the state confirmation of the target devicecorresponding to the selected device icon is output to the network.

In addition, the one or two or more memories further manage sixthinformation indicating that the one device icon is a device icon of thesecond device type (second type) and seventh information indicating atype of a device icon of the first device type (first type)corresponding to the device icon of the second device type (secondtype). When the one device icon is determined to be a device icon of thesecond device type (second type) based on the sixth information, adevice icon of the first device type (first type) corresponding to thedevice icon of the second device type (second type) is determined basedon the seventh information. Subsequently, an attribute of a roomcorresponding to the device icon of the first device type (first type)is determined based on the second information.

Furthermore, device new registration requests (registration notificationinformation) representing that two or more target devices among one ormore target devices have been newly registered in the home controlsystem (information management system) are received from the two or moretarget devices via the network. In this case, when the type of two ormore device icons representing each of the two or more target devicesare determined to be the same based on the device type (firstinformation), whether or not the two or more device icons are deviceicons of the second device type (second type) is determined based on thedevice type reference table (third information). When the two or moredevice icons are determined as device icons of the second device type(second type), an attribute of a room corresponding to a device icon ofthe first device type (first type) is determined. Subsequently, a devicetype (fourth information) indicating a type of the two or more deviceicons and a room type (fifth information) indicating the determinedattribute of the room are transmitted via the network to the homecontroller 100 (information apparatus). Based on the device type (fourthinformation) and the room type (fifth information), the two or moredevice icons are displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as the room in which the device icon of thefirst device type (first type) is displayed on the display 101 of thehome controller 100 (information apparatus).

In addition, the one or two or more memories further manage a usefrequency management table (eighth information) representing a usefrequency of a target device corresponding to a device icon of the firstdevice type (first type). When the one device icon is determined as adevice icon of the second device type (second type), a device icon ofthe first device type (first type) corresponding to the device icon ofthe second device type (second type) is determined. Furthermore, whenthe device icon of the second device type (second type) corresponds to aplurality of device icons of the first device type (first type), atarget device with highest use frequency among a plurality of targetdevices corresponding to the plurality of device icons of the firstdevice type (first type) is determined. An attribute of a roomcorresponding to the device icon of the first device type (first type)representing the target device determined to have the highest usefrequency is determined. Subsequently, the device type (fourthinformation) indicating the type of the one device icon and the roomtype (fifth information) indicating an attribute of a room correspondingto the device icon of the first device type (first type) representingthe target device determined to have the highest use frequency aretransmitted to the home controller 100 (information apparatus) via thenetwork.

In addition, the device icon of the first device type (first type) mayinclude a device icon representing a refrigerator and the device icon ofthe second device type (second type) may include a device iconrepresenting a microwave oven. Furthermore, the same room may be thekitchen.

In addition, the device icon of the first device type (first type) mayinclude a device icon representing a television set and the device iconof the second device type (second type) may include a device iconrepresenting a content reproducing machine that reproduces contents.

Furthermore, the device icon of the first device type (first type) mayinclude a device icon representing a television set and the device iconof the second device type (second type) may include a device iconrepresenting a content recording machine that records contents.

In addition, the device icon of the first device type (first type) mayinclude a device icon representing a television set, the device icon ofthe second device type (second type) may include a device iconrepresenting a content recording machine that records contents, and thesame room may be the living room.

Furthermore, the use frequency management table (eighth information) mayinclude information indicating turning on or off power of a targetdevice corresponding to the device icon of the first device type (firsttype).

In addition, the target device corresponding to the device icon of thefirst device type (first type) may be a television set, and the usefrequency management table (eighth information) may include informationindicating a viewing history of the television set.

A specific displaying process of a device icon corresponding to amicrowave oven will now be described.

FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is a microwave oven. Inthe following description, the device to be newly registered is amicrowave oven and a refrigerator has already been arranged. Inaddition, only the room type “kitchen” is associated with the devicetype “microwave oven”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the microwave oven thathas been newly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300receives the device new registration request shown in FIG. 129 from themicrowave oven.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 110502 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 110600 (FIG. 131). Inthis case, since the device type 110502 is a microwave oven, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts the room type “kitchen” from the referencetable 110600.

The device control section 302 then searches for a same room type as theroom type that is the search result in currently registered roominformation 111000 (FIG. 133). In this case, since the room type that isthe search result is the kitchen, the device control section 302 selectsthe kitchen from the room information 111000.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to a room in which a device of a type associated with thetype of the device 200 to be newly registered is already installed amongthe room types that are the search result. The device control section302 refers to the device type reference table 110700 and determineswhether or not a device type of the device 200 to be newly registered isthe second device type. In this case, since the device type of thedevice 200 to be newly registered is a microwave oven and a microwaveoven is of the second device type, it is determined that the device typeof the device 200 to be newly registered is the second device type.

The device control section 302 identifies the first device type that isassociated with the second device type. In this case, since therefrigerator is associated with the microwave oven, the device controlsection 302 determines the refrigerator as the first device type.Subsequently, the device control section 302 refers to the device list110800, identifies a room ID corresponding to a room (kitchen) in whicha device (refrigerator) of the identified first device type is alreadybeing installed, and extracts a room type (kitchen) corresponding to theidentified room ID from the room types that are the search result.

Next, the device control section 302 determines the number of room typesthat are the search result. In this case, since only one room type(kitchen) is extracted as the search result, the number of room typesthat are the search result is determined to be one and the devicecontrol section 302 searches for a room ID (F) and position information(room coordinates) of the one room type (kitchen) that is the searchresult. Subsequently, the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type (microwave oven)indicating a type of the device icon, the one room type (kitchen) thatis the search result, the searched room ID, and position informationrepresenting coordinates of the one room that is the search result tothe home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 111201 of thenewly registered microwave oven on the floor plan 500 based on thearrangement information. In this case, the device icon 111201 of themicrowave oven is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the kitchen. As described above, the microwave oven isassociated with the refrigerator and the device icon 111201 of themicrowave oven is displayed in the kitchen based on a room type of theroom in which the refrigerator is already arranged.

Next, a specific displaying process of a device icon corresponding to acontent reproducing machine will be described.

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest when a device to be newly registered is a content reproducingmachine, and FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a displayscreen of a home controller when a device to be newly registered is acontent reproducing machine. In the following description, the device tobe newly registered is a content reproducing machine and television setshave already been respectively arranged in the living room and thebedroom. Furthermore, use frequency of the television set arranged inthe living room is higher than use frequency of the television setarranged in the bedroom. Furthermore, the room types “living room”,“bedroom”, and “child room” are associated with the device type “contentreproducing machine”.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the content reproducingmachine that has been newly installed in the residence. In this case,the server 300 receives the device new registration request shown inFIG. 140 from the content reproducing machine.

Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to the device type 110502 included in the received devicenew registration request in the reference table 110600 (FIG. 131). Inthis case, since the device type 110502 is a content reproducingmachine, the device control section 302 extracts the room types “livingroom”, “bedroom”, and “child room” from the reference table 110600.

The device control section 302 then searches for a same room type as theroom type that is the search result in currently registered roominformation 111000 (FIG. 133). In this case, since the room types thatare the search result are the living room, the bedroom, and the childroom, the device control section 302 selects the living room, thebedroom, and the child room from the room information 111000.

1 Next, the device control section 302 searches for a room typecorresponding to a room in which a device of a type associated with thetype of the device 200 to be newly registered is already installed amongthe room types (the living room, the bedroom, and the child room) thatare the search result. The device control section 302 refers to thedevice type reference table 110700 and determines whether or not adevice type of the device 200 to be newly registered is the seconddevice type. In this case, since the device type of the device 200 to benewly registered is a content reproducing machine and a contentreproducing machine is of the second device type, it is determined thatthe device type of the device 200 to be newly registered is the seconddevice type.

The device control section 302 identifies the first device type that isassociated with the second device type. In this case, since the contentreproducing machine is associated with a television set, the devicecontrol section 302 determines the television set as the first devicetype. Subsequently, the device control section 302 refers to the devicelist 110800, identifies a room ID corresponding to rooms (living roomand bedroom) in which a device (television set) of the identified firstdevice type is already being installed, and extracts room types (livingroom and bedroom) corresponding to the identified room ID from the roomtypes that are the search result.

Next, the device control section 302 determines the number of room typesthat are the search result. In this case, since two room types (livingroom and bedroom) are extracted as a search result, the number of roomtypes that are the search result is determined as two or more and thedevice control section 302 searches for a room type corresponding to aroom in which is arranged a device with highest use frequency among theroom types that are the search result. In this case, since the usefrequency of the television set arranged in the living room is higherthan the use frequency of the television set arranged in the bedroom,the living room is extracted as the room type corresponding to a room inwhich is arranged the television set with highest use frequency.

Subsequently, the device control section 302 transmits arrangementinformation including a device type (content reproducing machine)indicating a type of the device icon, the room type (living room) thatis the search result, the searched room ID, and position informationrepresenting coordinates of the room that is the search result to thehome controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 111401 of thenewly registered content reproducing machine on the floor plan 500 basedon the arrangement information. In this case, the device icon 111401 ofthe content reproducing machine is displayed in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to the living room. In this manner, the contentreproducing machine is associated with the television set, andtelevision sets are arranged in a plurality of rooms. A room in which isarranged the television set with highest use frequency is searched amongthe plurality of rooms in which television sets are already arranged.Based on a room type of the searched room, the device icon 111401 of thecontent reproducing machine is displayed in the living room.

While a bird's eye view representing positions and shapes of roomsconstituting each floor in a planar manner is adopted as the floor plan500 in the description given above, the present embodiment is notlimited thereto and a diagram showing what kind of and how many roomsare on each floor in a simplified manner may also be adopted as a floorplan.

Hereinafter, a different pattern of a floor plan will be specificallydescribed. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern. On the floor plan 5200, one room constituting onefloor is represented by one square block and respective rooms on onefloor are arranged in a matrix pattern. In addition, sizes of therespective blocks are the same, and a name and an area of a room aredescribed in each block. Moreover, the area need not be described.

For example, the floor plan 5200 includes the respective rooms of aliving room, a kitchen, a dining room, a bathroom, a washroom, a toilet,a bedroom, and a child room. In addition, a device icon 501 of anactually arranged device 200 is displayed in each room. For example, thedevice icon 501 of an illumination device displayed in the living roomsignifies that an illumination device is installed in the living room.

Even when such a floor plan 5200 is displayed, a device icon of a deviceto be newly registered can be displayed in the same manner as describedearlier.

FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a device to be newly registered on the floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern.

On the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 143, a display method of a deviceicon when a device is to be newly registered is almost the same as thedisplay method of a device icon on the floor plan 500 described earlier.

In FIG. 143, a device icon 111201 of a newly registered microwave ovenis displayed on the floor plan 5200. A refrigerator that has alreadybeen registered is associated with the microwave oven to be newlyregistered. Therefore, the device icon 111201 of the newly registeredmicrowave oven is displayed in a region corresponding to the kitchenthat is a same room as the room in which the refrigerator is arranged.

While an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to a deviceto be newly registered is decided by the server 300 in the descriptiongiven above, the present disclosure is not particularly limited theretoand the arrangement position may be decided by the home controller 100.A process for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered by the home controller100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 144.

FIG. 144 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

When a device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S110301).

Next, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request from the device 200 andperforms an initial arrangement deciding process for deciding anarrangement position on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding tothe device 200 to be newly registered (S110302). Moreover, the initialarrangement deciding process by the home controller 100 will bedescribed later.

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S110304).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S111701). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300. In addition, when the arrangementinformation is not transmitted to the server 300, the home controlsystem need not include the server 300.

The initial arrangement deciding process shown in FIG. 144 will now bedescribed in greater detail.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by the home controller 100.

Since the process performed in steps S112001 to S112006 in FIG. 145 isthe same as the process performed in steps S110401 to S110406 shown inFIG. 130, a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the devicemanagement section 105 of the home controller 100 executes the processof steps S112001 to S112006 in place of the device control section 302of the server 300. Furthermore, the home controller 100 stores thereference table 110600 (FIG. 131), the room information 111000 (FIG.133), the device list 110800 (FIG. 137), the vertex information 110910(FIG. 134), the device type reference table (FIG. 136), and the usefrequency management table 110900 (FIG. 138).

When it is determined that the number of room types that are the searchresult is one (“one” in S112005) or when a room type corresponding to aroom in which is arranged a device with highest use frequency issearched in step S112006, the device control section 302 decides adevice type indicating a type of the device icon, a room type of acorresponding room, a room ID of the corresponding room, and positioninformation representing a position of the corresponding room on thefloor plan (S112007).

When it is determined that the number of room types that are the searchresult is one, the device control section 302 searches for a room ID andposition information of the one room type that is the search result anddecides a device type indicating a type of the device icon, the one roomtype that is the search result, the searched room ID, and positioninformation representing coordinates of the one room type that is thesearch result.

In addition, when a room type corresponding to a room in which isarranged a device with highest use frequency is searched in stepS112006, the device control section 302 decides a device type indicatinga type of the device icon, a room type corresponding to the room inwhich is arranged a device with highest use frequency, a room ID of theroom in which is arranged a device with highest use frequency, andposition information representing a position of the room in which isarranged a device with highest use frequency.

On the other hand, when the number of room types that are the searchresult is determined to be zero (“zero” in S112005), the device controlsection 302 decides a device type indicating a type of a device iconrepresenting the device to be newly registered and display regioninformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen(S112008).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

Next, the display control section 103 displays a device iconcorresponding to the newly registered device 200 and updates the displayscreen (S112009). At this point, when it is determined that the numberof room types that are the search result is zero, the display controlsection 103 displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registereddevice 200 outside the floor plan based on the device type and displayregion information and updates the display screen. On the other hand,when it is determined that the number of remaining room types is one ortwo or more, the display control section 103 displays a device iconcorresponding to the newly registered device 200 on the floor plan basedon the decided device type, room type, room ID, and positioninformation, and updates the display screen.

Moreover, the display control section 103 displays a display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500 including one or more rooms on thedisplay 101. In addition, the display control section 103 uses one ortwo or more memories that manage, in association with each other, adevice type (first information) indicating types of one or more deviceicons representing each of one or more target devices and a room type(second information) indicating an attribute of each of the one or morerooms and displays the one or more device icons in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of theone or more device icons in accordance with the types of the one or moredevice icons.

Furthermore, when selection of any of the one or more device icons issensed in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in thefloor plan 500, the display control section 103 displays a controlscreen for at least any of operation and state confirmation of a targetdevice corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screenrepresenting the floor plan 500. Subsequently, based on an operation onthe control screen, the communication control section 107 outputs acontrol command for at least any of the operation and the stateconfirmation of the target device corresponding to the selected deviceicon to the network.

In addition, the one or more device icons include a device icon of afirst device type (first type) and a device icon of a second device type(second type) that is in a relationship of being displayed in a regionon the display screen corresponding to a same room as a room in whichthe device icon of the first device type (first type) is displayed.

When one device icon among the one or more device icons is determined tobe a device icon of the second device type (second type), the displaycontrol section 103 displays the one device icon in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first device type (first type) is displayed.

In addition, the one or two or more memories further manage thirdinformation indicating that the one device icon is a device icon of thesecond device type (second type) and fourth information indicating atype of a device icon of the first device type (first type)corresponding to the device icon of the second device type (secondtype). When the one device icon is determined to be a device icon of thesecond device type (second type) based on the third information, thedisplay control section 103 determines a room in which the device iconof the first device type (first type) is displayed based on the fourthinformation. Furthermore, the display control section 103 displays theone device icon in a region on the display screen corresponding to asame room as the determined room.

In addition, when one or two or more device icons among the one or moredevice icons are determined to be device icons of the second device type(second type), the display control section 103 may display the one ortwo or more device icons in a region on the display screen correspondingto a same room as the room in which the device icon of the first devicetype (first type) is displayed.

Furthermore, the device icon of the first device type (first type) mayinclude a device icon representing a refrigerator and the device icon ofthe second device type (second type) may include a device iconrepresenting a microwave oven. Moreover, the same room may be thekitchen.

In addition, the device icon of the first device type (first type) mayinclude a device icon representing a television set and the device iconof the second device type (second type) may include a device iconrepresenting a content reproducing machine that reproduces contents.

Furthermore, the device icon of the first device type (first type) mayinclude a device icon representing a television set and the device iconof the second device type (second type) may include a device iconrepresenting a content recording machine that records contents.Moreover, the same room may be the living room.

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the server 300 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 128, thepresent disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and the device200 may transmit a device new registration request to the homecontroller 100 and the home controller 100 may transmit a devicearrangement request for requesting that a display position of a deviceicon corresponding to a newly registered device be decided to the server300. A process for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered by the server 300 whenthe device 200 transmits a device new registration request to the homecontroller 100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 146.

FIG. 146 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the server300 for deciding an arrangement position of a device icon correspondingto a device to be newly registered when the device 200 transmits adevice new registration request to the home controller 100.

When a device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S110301).In this case, the device new registration request includes a device IDand a device type.

Next, the communication control section 107 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request transmitted by the device200 and transmits a device arrangement request for requesting that adisplay position of a device icon corresponding to a newly registereddevice be decided to the server 300 (S111801). In this case, the devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype. The communication control section 107 creates a device arrangementrequest in which a residence ID is added to the device ID and the devicetype included in the received device new registration request andtransmits the device arrangement request.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice arrangement request from the device 200 and performs an initialarrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangement position on thefloor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device 200 to be newlyregistered (S110302). Moreover, the initial arrangement deciding processis as described earlier.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S110303).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S110304).

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the home controller 100 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG.144, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and thedevice 200 may transmit a device new registration request to the server300 and the server 300 may transmit a device arrangement request forrequesting that a display position of a device icon corresponding to anewly registered device be decided to the home controller 100. A processfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered by the home controller 100 when the device200 transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 willnow be described with reference to FIG. 147.

FIG. 147 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the server 300 (S110301). Thedevice new registration request includes a residence ID, a device ID,and a device type.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and transmits adevice arrangement request for requesting that a display position of adevice icon corresponding to a newly registered device be decided to thehome controller 100 (S111901). At this point, the device control section302 stores the newly registered device in a device list. The devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype.

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thenreceives the device arrangement request from the server 300 and performsan initial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S110302). Moreover, the initial arrangementdeciding process is as described earlier.

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S110304).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S111701). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300.

(Device icon arranging process 4) Next, a device icon arranging process4 in which a device icon is automatically arranged on a floor plan willbe described.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing an example of a first floor plan 5001 andFIG. 149 is a diagram showing an example of a second floor plan 5002.

The first floor plan 5001 shown in FIG. 148 and the second floor plan5002 shown in FIG. 149 differ from each other in room arrangements.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a display screen corresponding to a firstresidence that is displayed on the display 101 of the home controller100. FIG. 151 is a diagram showing a display screen corresponding to asecond residence that is displayed on the display 101 of the homecontroller 100, and FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a display screencorresponding to a third residence that is displayed on the display 101of the home controller 100.

While the display screen shown in FIG. 150 and the display screen shownin FIG. 151 both display the first floor plan 5001 and share samearrangement positions of rooms, the display screens differ from eachother in arrangement positions of the device icon 501. The displayscreen shown in FIG. 152 displays the second floor plan 5002 thatdiffers from the floor plans shown in FIGS. 150 and 151.

For example, on the display screen shown in FIG. 150, a device icon ofan air conditioner is displayed in a region corresponding to a westernstyle room 1 but the device icon is not displayed in a regioncorresponding to a western style room 2. By comparison, on the displayscreen shown in FIG. 151, a device icon is not displayed in a regioncorresponding to the western style room 1 but device icons of atelevision set and an air conditioner are displayed in a regioncorresponding to the western style room 2. In this manner, even whenlayouts are the same, arrangements of devices as well as positions ofdisplayed device icons differ from one residence to another.

Next, a flow of a process for newly registering the device 200 in a homecontrol system (information management system) will be described withreference to the drawings. The home control system connects to a networkwhich controls one or more target devices managed in association with asame building ID, and manages information of the one or more targetdevices.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen that isdisplayed on the display 101 of the home controller 100 before a deviceis newly registered. As shown in FIG. 153, the first floor plan 5001 isdisplayed on the display 101 of the home controller 100. A device icon501 corresponding to a device arranged in each room is displayed on thefirst floor plan 5001.

FIG. 154 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a displaying processfor displaying a device icon corresponding to a device to be newlyregistered on a floor plan.

First, when the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room insidethe house, the communication control section 217 of the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 (S120701).

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of a device new registrationrequest that is transmitted when an air conditioner is to be newlyregistered. As shown in FIG. 155, the device new registration requestincludes a residence ID 120901 for identifying a residence in which thedevice 200 is to be arranged, a device ID 120902 for identifying thedevice 200, and a device type 120903 for identifying a type of thedevice 200.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 inquiresa residence ID to the home controller 100, acquires the residence IDfrom the home controller 100, and creates a device new registrationrequest.

Moreover, while the communication control section 217 of the device 200acquires the residence ID from the home controller 100 in the presentembodiment, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto.When the device 200 and the server 300 are connected to each other via agateway installed in the home, the gateway may provide the residence ID.Specifically, the communication control section 217 of the device 200may transmit a device new registration request including the device ID120902 and the device type 120903, and the gateway may include theresidence ID in the device new registration request from the device 200and transmit the device new registration request to the server 300.Alternatively, the device 200 may accept input of a residence ID by theuser.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and performs aninitial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S120702). Moreover, the initial arrangementdeciding process by the server 300 will be described later.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S120703).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S120704).

The initial arrangement deciding process shown in FIG. 154 will now bedescribed in greater detail.

FIG. 156 is a flow chart for explaining an initial arrangement decidingprocess by the server 300.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not thedevice new registration request from the device 200 has been received(S120801). The server 300 receives, from one target device among the oneor more target devices via the network, a device new registrationrequest (registration notification information) representing that theone target device has been newly registered in the home control system(information management system).

At this point, when it is determined that the device new registrationrequest from the device 200 has not been received (NO in S120801), theprocess is finished.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the device newregistration request from the device 200 has been received (YES inS120801), the device control section 302 determines a floor plancorresponding to the residence in which the newly registered device 200is to be arranged (S120802).

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing an example of a layout type referencetable 121000 that is managed by the server 300. As shown in FIG. 157,the layout type reference table 121000 associates a residence ID 121001and a layout type 121002 with each other. The layout type 121002represents a type of layout.

The device control section 302 refers to the layout type reference table121000 and determines a layout type associated with the residence IDincluded in the device new registration request.

Next, the device control section 302 extracts a candidate of a room inwhich the registered device is to be arranged (S120803).

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing an example of a device list 121100 that ismanaged by the server 300. As shown in FIG. 158, the device list 121100includes a residence ID 121101, a device ID 121102, a device type121103, an arrangement 121104, and an installation room 121105.

The residence ID 121101 is an identifier of a residence. The device ID121102 is an identifier of the device 200. The device type 121103indicates a type of the device 200. The arrangement 121104 iscoordinates which are expressed by an (X coordinate, Y coordinate, floornumber) format and indicates an arrangement position on the floor plan500 of the device icon 501 corresponding to the device 200. Theinstallation room 121105 indicates a name of a room in which a device isinstalled. Moreover, the device list 121100 may include capabilityinformation 4705 and a control command transmission destination 4706 asshown in FIG. 34. Alternatively, the device list 121100 may include amodel number of the device 200.

FIG. 159 is a diagram showing an example of the layout management table121200 representing a correspondence relationship between a device typeand a room for each floor plan. As shown in FIG. 159, the layoutmanagement table 121200 associates, with each other, a layout type121201, a device type 121202, a room 121203, and an installation ratio121204. The layout type 121201 indicates a type of layout. The devicetype 121202 indicates a type of the device 200. The room 121203indicates a name of a room candidate in which the device 200 is to beinstalled. The installation ratio 121204 indicates a ratio at which adevice indicated by the device type 121202 is installed in a roomindicated by the room 121203.

The device control section 302 refers to the layout management table121200 and extracts room candidates corresponding to a device type of adevice to be registered with respect to the floor plan determined instep S120802. For example, when the layout type is “A” and the devicetype is “air conditioner”, the device control section 302 extracts the“living room”, the “western style room 1”, and the “western style room2” as room candidates.

Next, the device control section 302 excludes a room in which a deviceof a same type as the device 200 to be newly registered is alreadyinstalled from the room candidates in which the newly registered device200 is to be installed (S120804). The chance of the newly registereddevice 200 being installed is low in a room in which a device of a sametype as the device 200 to be newly registered is already installed.Therefore, a room in which a device of a same type as the device 200 tobe newly registered is already installed is excluded from installationcandidates of the device 200 to be newly registered.

The device control section 302 refers to the device list 121100 andexcludes a room corresponding to a same device type as the device typeof the device 200 to be newly registered from the room candidatesextracted in step S120803.

Next, the device control section 302 calculates an installation ratio ofa device type for each layout type and for each room (S120805).

Based on the device list 121100 and the layout type reference table121000, the device control section 302 calculates a ratio at which aprescribed device is installed in a prescribed room in a prescribedlayout for each layout type and for each room. For example, a pluralityof residence IDs are associated with the layout type “A”. A plurality ofdevice types are further associated with a residence ID “1” among theplurality of residence IDs. Two installation rooms, the “living room”and the “western style room 1”, are associated with a device type “airconditioner” among the plurality of device types. In this manner, thedevice control section 302 aggregates the number of residencescorresponding to the layout type “A” and the number of residences whichcorrespond to the layout type “A” and in which the device type “airconditioner” is installed in the living room. Accordingly, a ratio atwhich the device type “air conditioner” is installed in the living roomamong the layout type “A” can be calculated. In a similar manner, thedevice control section 302 calculates a ratio at which the device type“air conditioner” is installed in the western style room 1 and thewestern style room 2 among the layout type “A”.

As shown in FIG. 159, the ratio at which the device type “airconditioner” is installed in the “living room” among the layout type “A”is, for example, 80%, the ratio at which the device type “airconditioner” is installed in the “western style room 1” among the layouttype “A” is, for example, 40%, and the ratio at which the device type“air conditioner” is installed in the “western style room 2” among thelayout type “A” is, for example, 10%.

Moreover, the device control section 302 stores the installation ratioof a device type calculated for each layout type and for each room inthe layout management table 121200 and updates the layout managementtable 121200.

Next, the device control section 302 determines the number of roomsremaining after the exclusion in step S120804 (S120806). In this case,when it is determined that the number of remaining rooms is two or more(“two or more” in S120806), the device control section 302 searches fora room with a highest installation ratio among the remaining rooms(S120807). The device control section 302 refers to the layoutmanagement table 121200 and searches for a room with a highestinstallation ratio among the remaining rooms.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of remainingrooms is one (“one” in S120806) or when a room with a highestinstallation ratio among the remaining rooms is searched in stepS120807, the device control section 302 transmits arrangementinformation including a device type indicating a type of a device iconand a room type of the one remaining room or the room with the highestinstallation ratio to the home controller 100 (S120808).

When it is determined that the number of remaining rooms is one, thedevice control section 302 transmits arrangement information including adevice type indicating a type of a device icon and the one remainingroom type to the home controller 100.

In addition, when a room with a highest installation ratio among theremaining rooms is searched in step S120807, the device control section302 transmits arrangement information including a device type indicatinga type of a device icon and a room type of the room with the highestinstallation ratio among the remaining rooms to the home controller 100.

Furthermore, when the number of remaining room types is determined to bezero (“zero” in S120806), the device control section 302 transmitsarrangement information including a device type indicating a type of adevice icon and display region information indicating a prescribedregion on the display screen (S120809).

Moreover, for example, the prescribed region on the display screen is aregion outside the display region of the floor plan 500 in the displayscreen.

When the number of remaining rooms is one or zero, the installationratio of a device type is not used. Therefore, after the process of stepS120804, a transition is made to the process of step S120806 withoutperforming the process of step S120805, and when the number of remainingrooms is determined to be two or more in step S120806, the process ofstep S120805 may be performed.

As described above, a residence ID (first information) capable ofidentifying a type of a floor plan of a residence (building) displayedon the display 101 of the home controller 100 (information apparatus) isreceived from the home controller 100 (information apparatus) via thenetwork. A floor plan of a same type as the type of the floor planindicated by the residence ID (first information) is determined using afirst database that manages a layout type (second information)indicating a type of each floor plan. Using a second database thatmanages, for each type of floor plan, an installation ratio (thirdinformation) indicating a frequency at which each of one or more deviceicons is displayed in each of one or more rooms included in a floorplan, one or more device icons to be displayed on a floor plandetermined to be of the same type and a room in which each of the one ormore device icons is to be displayed are decided.

In addition, a device type (fourth information) indicating the decidedone or more device icons and a room type (fifth information) indicatinga room in which each of the decided one or more device icons is to bedisplayed are transmitted to the home controller 100 (informationapparatus) via the network. Based on the device type (fourthinformation) and the room type (fifth information), the one or moredevice icons are displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to each of the one or more device icons representing afloor plan on the display 101 of the home controller 100 (informationapparatus).

Furthermore, using a third database that manages a device list (sixthinformation) indicating, for each type of floor plan, in which room eachdevice icon is displayed, a frequency at which each of the one or moredevice icons is displayed in each of the one or more rooms is calculatedfor each type of floor plan.

In addition, the residence ID (first information) and a device type(seventh information) indicating a type of a new device icon to be newlydisplayed on a floor plan indicated by the residence ID (firstinformation) are received from the home controller 100 (informationapparatus) via the network. Using the second database, a room in which adevice icon of a type indicated by the device type (seventh information)is already displayed is excluded from room candidates in which a deviceicon of the type indicated by the device type (seventh information) isto be displayed on a floor plan of a type indicated by the residence ID(first information). When a plurality of room candidates remain, a roomwith a highest frequency of the device icon of the type indicated by thedevice type (seventh information) being displayed is decided among theplurality of room candidates and the room type (fifth information)indicating the decided room is transmitted to the home controller 100(information apparatus) via the network. Based on the room type (fifthinformation) and the device type (seventh information), the new deviceicon is displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to thedecided room on the display 101 of the home controller 100 (informationapparatus).

In addition, when one room candidate remains, the one room candidate isdecided as a room in which a device icon of a type indicated by thedevice type (seventh information) is to be displayed, and the room type(fifth information) indicating the decided room is transmitted to thehome controller 100 (information apparatus) via the network. Based onthe room type (fifth information) and the device type (seventhinformation), the new device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to the decided room on the display 101 ofthe home controller 100 (information apparatus).

Furthermore, when there is no remaining room candidate, a region outsidethe floor plan of a type indicated by the residence ID (firstinformation) is decided as a region in which a device icon of a typeindicated by the device type (seventh information) is to be displayed,and the room type (fifth information) indicating the decided region istransmitted to the home controller 100 (information apparatus) via thenetwork. Based on the room type (fifth information) and the device type(seventh information), the new device icon is displayed in a regionoutside the floor plan on the display 101 of the home controller 100(information apparatus).

A specific displaying process of a device icon will now be described.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is an air conditioner.In the following description, the device to be newly registered is anair conditioner and is to be registered in residence ID “5”. Inaddition, the device list 121100 stores data representing that one airconditioner is already arranged in the living room.

First, the device control section 302 determines whether or not a devicenew registration request has been received from the refrigerator thathas been newly installed in the residence. In this case, the server 300receives the device new registration request shown in FIG. 155 from theair conditioner.

Next, the device control section 302 refers to the layout type referencetable 121000 (FIG. 157) and determines a layout type associated with theresidence ID included in the device new registration request. In thiscase, since the residence ID included in the device new registrationrequest is “5”, the layout type “A” is selected. The layout type “A”corresponds to the first floor plan 5001 shown in FIG. 148.

The device control section 302 then refers to the layout managementtable 121200 (FIG. 159) and extracts room candidates corresponding to adevice type of the device to be registered with respect to thedetermined floor plan. In this case, since the layout type is “A” andthe device type is “air conditioner”, the device control section 302extracts the “living room”, the “western style room 1”, and the “westernstyle room 2” as room candidates.

Next, the device control section 302 refers to the device list 121100(FIG. 158) and excludes a room corresponding to a same device type asthe device type of the device 200 to be newly registered from theextracted room candidates. In this case, since an air conditioner isalready arranged in the living room in the residence of which residenceID is “5” on the device list 121100, the device control section 302excludes the “living room” from the candidates “living room”, the“western style room 1”, and the “western style room 2”. As a result, the“western style room 1” and the “western style room 2” remain as roomcandidates in which the newly registered device is to be installed.

Subsequently, based on the device list 121100 (FIG. 158) and the layouttype reference table 121000 (FIG. 157), the device control section 302calculates a ratio at which a prescribed device is installed in aprescribed room in a prescribed layout for each layout type and for eachroom. As a result, when the layout type is “A”, the ratio at which anair conditioner is installed in the living room is, for example, 80%,the ratio at which an air conditioner is installed in the western styleroom 1 is, for example, 40%, and the ratio at which an air conditioneris installed in the western style room 2 is, for example, 10%.

Next, the device control section 302 determines the number of remainingrooms. In this case, since the “western style room 1” and the “westernstyle room 2” remain as candidates in which the newly registered deviceis to be installed, it is determined that the number of remaining roomsis two or more.

Subsequently, the device control section 302 refers to the layoutmanagement table 121200 (FIG. 159) and searches for a room with ahighest installation ratio among the remaining rooms. In this case, whenthe layout type is “A”, the ratio at which an air conditioner isinstalled in the “western style room 1” is 40% and the ratio at which anair conditioner is installed in the “western style room 2” is 10%.Therefore, the device control section 302 selects the “western styleroom 1” with the highest installation ratio among the remaining “westernstyle room 1” and “western style room 2”.

Next, the device control section 302 transmits arrangement informationincluding a device type (air conditioner) indicating a type of a deviceicon and a room type (western style room 1) of a room with the highestinstallation ratio among the remaining rooms to the home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 121301 of thenewly registered air conditioner on the first floor plan 5001 based onthe arrangement information. In this case, the device icon 121301 of theair conditioner is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the western style room 1. As described above, a displayposition of the device icon 121301 of the air conditioner is decided asa room with the highest installation ratio on a same floor plan among aplurality of room candidates.

Subsequently, another example of the initial arrangement decidingprocess shown in FIG. 154 will be described.

FIG. 161 is a flow chart for explaining another example of the initialarrangement deciding process by the server 300. Since the processperformed in steps S121401 to S121407 in FIG. 161 is the same as theprocess performed in steps S120801 to S120807 shown in FIG. 156, adescription thereof will be omitted.

When it is determined that the number of remaining rooms is one (“one”in S121406) or when a room with the highest installation ratio among theremaining rooms is searched in step S121407, the device control section302 calculates an average arrangement position where a device icon ofeach device is to be displayed for each floor plan and for each room(S121408).

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing an example of the layout management table121500 representing a correspondence relationship between a device typeand a room for each floor plan. As shown in FIG. 162, the layoutmanagement table 121500 associates, with each other, a layout type121201, a device type 121202, a room 121203, an installation ratio121204, and an average arrangement position 121501. The averagearrangement position 121501 indicates a display position where a deviceicon indicated by the device type 121202 is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a room indicated by the room 121203.

The device control section 302 refers to the device list 121100,extracts an arrangement position (arrangement 121104) in each room ofeach device icon in all residences having a same layout type, andrespectively calculates an average of the extracted arrangementpositions. The device control section 302 stores the calculated averagearrangement position in the layout management table 121500 and updatesthe layout management table 121500.

Next, the device control section 302 transmits arrangement informationincluding a device type indicating a type of a device icon, a room typeof the one remaining room or the room with the highest installationratio, and a calculated average arrangement position corresponding tothe device type and the room type to the home controller 100 (S121409).

When it is determined in step S121406 that the number of remaining roomsis one, the device control section 302 transmits arrangement informationincluding a device type indicating a type of a device icon, the oneremaining room type, and the calculated average arrangement position tothe home controller 100.

In addition, when a room with a highest installation ratio among theremaining rooms is searched in step S121407, the device control section302 transmits arrangement information including a device type indicatinga type of a device icon, a room type of the room with the highestinstallation ratio among the remaining rooms, and the calculated averagearrangement position to the home controller 100.

Since the process of step S121410 is the same as the process of stepS120809 shown in FIG. 156, a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, the layout management table 121500 (second database)further manages an average arrangement position of a device icon in eachroom. A room type (fifth information) indicating a decided room and anaverage arrangement position (eighth information) of a device icon inthe decided room are transmitted to the home controller 100 (informationapparatus) via the network. In addition, based on the room type (fifthinformation), the device type (seventh information), and the averagearrangement position (eighth information), the new device icon isdisplayed at an average arrangement position in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to the decided room on the display 101 of the homecontroller 100 (information apparatus).

A specific displaying process of a device icon will now be described.

FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of a homecontroller when a device to be newly registered is an air conditioner.In the following description, the device to be newly registered is anair conditioner and is to be registered in residence ID “5”. The devicelist 121100 stores data representing that one air conditioner is alreadyarranged in the living room.

Since a process from receiving a device new registration request tosearching for a room with a highest installation ratio among remainingrooms are the same as the displaying process described with reference toFIG. 160, a description thereof will be omitted.

The device control section 302 refers to the device list 121100 (FIG.158), extracts an arrangement position (arrangement 121104) of a deviceicon in all residences having a same layout type, and calculates anaverage of the extracted arrangement positions. For example, the devicecontrol section 302 extracts an arrangement position of a device icon ofan air conditioner in each room in all residences with a layout type of“A” and calculates an average of the extracted arrangement positions foreach room. As a result, for example, an average arrangement position ofa device icon of an air conditioner to be arranged in the living room is(X10, Y90, Z1), an average arrangement position of a device icon of anair conditioner to be arranged in the western style room 1 is (X140,Y40, Z1), and an average arrangement position of a device icon of an airconditioner to be arranged in the western style room 2 is (X90, Y15,Z1).

Next, the device control section 302 transmits arrangement informationincluding a device type (air conditioner) indicating a type of a deviceicon, a room type (western style room 1) with the highest installationratio among the remaining rooms, and a calculated average arrangementposition (X140, Y40, Z1) to the home controller 100.

Upon receiving the arrangement information, the display control section103 of the home controller 100 displays a device icon 121301 of thenewly registered air conditioner on the first floor plan 5001 based onthe arrangement information. In this case, the device icon 121301 of theair conditioner is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the western style room 1. In addition, the device icon121301 of the air conditioner is displayed at a position expressed as(X140, Y40, Z1). As described above, a display position of the deviceicon 121301 of the air conditioner is decided in a room with the highestinstallation ratio on a same floor plan among a plurality of roomcandidates and at an average arrangement position among a plurality ofsame floor plans.

While a bird's eye view representing positions and shapes of roomsconstituting each floor in a planar manner is adopted as the first floorplan 5001 and the second floor plan 5002 in the description given above,the present embodiment is not limited thereto and a diagram showing whatkind of and how many rooms are on each floor in a simplified manner mayalso be adopted as a floor plan.

Hereinafter, a different pattern of a floor plan will be specificallydescribed. FIG. 164 is a diagram showing a floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern. On the floor plan 5200, one room constituting onefloor is represented by one square block and respective rooms on onefloor are arranged in a matrix pattern. In addition, sizes of therespective blocks are the same, and a name and an area of a room aredescribed in each block.

For example, the floor plan 5200 includes the respective rooms of aliving room, a kitchen, a dining room, a bathroom, a washroom, a toilet,a bedroom, and a child room. In addition, a device icon 501 of anactually arranged device 200 is displayed in each room. For example, thedevice icons 501 of an illumination device and an air conditionerdisplayed in the living room signify that an illumination device and anair conditioner are installed in the living room.

Even when such a floor plan 5200 is displayed, a device icon of a deviceto be newly registered can be displayed in the same manner as describedearlier.

FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining an example of displaying a deviceicon of a device to be newly registered on the floor plan 5200 with adifferent pattern.

On the floor plan 5200 shown in FIG. 165, a display method of a deviceicon when a device is to be newly registered is almost the same as thedisplay method of a device icon on the floor plan 500 described earlier.

In FIG. 165, a device icon 121301 of a newly registered air conditioneris displayed on the floor plan 5200. A display position of the deviceicon 121301 of the newly registered air conditioner is decided in a roomwith the highest installation ratio on a same floor plan among aplurality of room candidates. Therefore, the device icon 121301 of thenewly registered air conditioner is displayed in a region correspondingto the bedroom that has the highest installation ratio among a pluralityof room candidates (the bedroom and the child room) excluding the livingroom in which an air conditioner has already been arranged.

While an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to a deviceto be newly registered is decided by the server 300 in the descriptiongiven above, the present disclosure is not particularly limited theretoand the arrangement position may be decided by the home controller 100.A process for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered by the home controller100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 166.

FIG. 166 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered.

When a device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S120701).

Next, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request from the device 200 andperforms an initial arrangement deciding process for deciding anarrangement position on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding tothe device 200 to be newly registered (S120702).

Subsequently, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S120704).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S121901). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300. In addition, when the arrangementinformation is not transmitted to the server 300, the home controlsystem need not include the server 300.

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the server 300 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG. 154, thepresent disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and the device200 may transmit a device new registration request to the homecontroller 100 and the home controller 100 may transmit a devicearrangement request for requesting that a display position of a deviceicon corresponding to a newly registered device be decided to the server300. A process for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered by the server 300 whenthe device 200 transmits a device new registration request to the homecontroller 100 will now be described with reference to FIG. 167.

FIG. 167 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the server300 for deciding an arrangement position of a device icon correspondingto a device to be newly registered when the device 200 transmits adevice new registration request to the home controller 100.

When a device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the home controller 100 (S120701).In this case, the device new registration request includes a device IDand a device type.

Next, the communication control section 107 of the home controller 100receives the device new registration request transmitted by the device200 and transmits a device arrangement request for requesting that adisplay position of a device icon corresponding to a newly registereddevice be decided to the server 300 (S122001). In this case, the devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype. The communication control section 107 creates a device arrangementrequest in which a residence ID is added to the device ID and the devicetype included in the received device new registration request andtransmits the device arrangement request.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice arrangement request from the device 200 and performs an initialarrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangement position on thefloor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device 200 to be newlyregistered (S120702). Moreover, the initial arrangement deciding processis as described earlier.

The device control section 302 of the server 300 then transmitsarrangement information indicating the arrangement position of thedevice icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process to thehome controller 100 (S120703).

Next, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100receives the arrangement information transmitted by the server 300,displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the received arrangement information, andupdates the display screen (S120704).

In addition, while the device 200 transmits a device new registrationrequest to the home controller 100 in the sequence diagram shown in FIG.166, the present disclosure is not particularly limited thereto and thedevice 200 may transmit a device new registration request to the server300 and the server 300 may transmit a device arrangement request forrequesting that a display position of a device icon corresponding to anewly registered device be decided to the home controller 100. A processfor deciding an arrangement position of a device icon corresponding to adevice to be newly registered by the home controller 100 when the device200 transmits a device new registration request to the server 300 willnow be described with reference to FIG. 168.

FIG. 168 is a sequence diagram showing a flow of a process by the homecontroller 100 for deciding an arrangement position of a device iconcorresponding to a device to be newly registered when the device 200transmits a device new registration request to the server 300.

When the device 200 is newly arranged in a prescribed room inside thehouse, the communication control section 217 of the device 200 transmitsa device new registration request to the server 300 (S120701). Thedevice new registration request includes a residence ID, a device ID,and a device type.

Next, the device control section 302 of the server 300 receives thedevice new registration request from the device 200 and transmits adevice arrangement request for requesting that a display position of adevice icon corresponding to a newly registered device be decided to thehome controller 100 (S122101). At this point, the device control section302 stores the newly registered device in a device list. The devicearrangement request includes a residence ID, a device ID, and a devicetype.

Next, the device management section 105 of the home controller 100receives the device arrangement request from the server 300 and performsan initial arrangement deciding process for deciding an arrangementposition on the floor plan of a device icon corresponding to the device200 to be newly registered (S120702).

Subsequently, the display control section 103 of the home controller 100displays a device icon corresponding to the newly registered device 200on the floor plan based on the decided arrangement position and updatesthe display screen (S120704).

The device management section 105 of the home controller 100 thentransmits arrangement information indicating the arrangement position ofthe device icon decided by the initial arrangement deciding process tothe server 300 (S121901). The device control section 302 of the server300 updates a device list based on the received arrangement information.Moreover, the home controller 100 need not transmit the arrangementinformation to the server 300.

As described above,

-   -   a first aspect of the present disclosure provides    -   a method for controlling information apparatus having a display        and being connected to a network, over which one or more target        devices are controlled,    -   the method causing a computer of the information apparatus to:    -   display on the display a display screen representing a floor        plan including one or more rooms;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing the one or more        target devices and the second information indicating an        attribute of each of the one or more rooms, display each of the        one or more device icons in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or        more device icons in accordance with the type of each of the one        or more device icons;    -   when selection of any of the one or more device icons is sensed        in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in the        floor plan, display a control screen for at least any of        operation and state confirmation of a target device        corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screen        representing the floor plan; and    -   output to the network a control command for at least any of the        operation and the state confirmation of the target device        corresponding to the selected device icon, based on an operation        on the control screen.

According to the first aspect described above, using at least one memoryassociates first information with second information, the firstinformation indicating a type of each of one or more device iconsrepresenting the one or more target devices and the second informationindicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms, each of theone or more device icons are displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or moredevice icons in accordance with the type of each of the one or moredevice icons.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a refrigerator, adevice icon representing a refrigerator is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a kitchen. In addition, when the targetdevice is a toilet seat apparatus with a washing function, a device iconrepresenting a toilet seat apparatus with a washing function isdisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to a toilet.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

In the first aspect described above, for example, the room correspondingto each of the one or more device icons may be determined in accordancewith the type of each of the one or more device icons using the firstinformation and the second information, and each of the one or moredevice icons may be displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the determined room.

In the first aspect described above, for example, the at least onememory may further store third information indicating a position of eachof the one or more rooms on the floor plan, the region corresponding toeach of the one or more rooms may be determined using the thirdinformation, and each of the one or more device icons may be displayedin the region on the display screen corresponding to the room thatcorresponds to each of the one or more device icons in accordance withthe type of each of the one or more device icons.

In the first aspect described above, for example, the at least onememory may further store third information indicating position of eachof the one or more rooms on the floor plan, the room corresponding toeach of the one or more device icons may be determined, in accordancewith the type of each of the one or more device icons using the firstinformation and the second information, a region corresponding to eachof the one or more rooms may be determined using the third information,and each of the one or more device icons may be displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to the determined room.

In the first aspect described above, for example, when it is determinedthat one device icon among the one or more device icons corresponds to aplurality of rooms among the one or more rooms based on the firstinformation, the one device icon may be displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a largest room among the plurality ofthe corresponding rooms.

According to the first aspect described above, when it is determinedthat one device icon among the one or more device icons representingeach of one or more target devices corresponds to a plurality of roomsamong the one or more rooms, the one device icon is displayed in aregion on the display screen corresponding to a largest room among theplurality of the corresponding rooms.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a television set anda device icon representing the television set corresponds to a pluralityof rooms such as a living room, a study, and a bedroom, the device iconis displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to alargest room among the plurality of the corresponding rooms such as theliving room.

Therefore, for example, since the device icon representing thetelevision set is displayed in a region corresponding to the living roomwithout requiring the user to set a correspondence relationship betweenthe device icon and a room corresponding to the device icon, erroneousoperations of displaying the device icon in a region other than a regioncorresponding to a room that corresponds to the device icon by mistakecan be reduced. In addition, if a display position of the device iconmust be changed, for example, the device icon can be moved into a regioncorresponding to a room such as a bedroom that differs from the livingroom by a user's operation after the device icon is displayed. In thiscase, since a user's operation is only accepted when the displayposition must be changed, operations by the user can be made lesscomplicated.

In addition, since the device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a largest room such as the living roomamong the plurality of corresponding rooms, the device icon is to bedisplayed at a most likely display position. In other words, the deviceicon is to be displayed at a position where a change in display positionis least likely. Therefore, since the device icon can be displayedwithout involving a setting made by the user and the likelihood of thedisplay position of the device icon being changed is low, erroneousoperations by the user can be significantly reduced.

Furthermore, since the device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a largest room such as the living roomamong the plurality of corresponding rooms, a situation where a largenumber of device icons are displayed in a mixed manner in a small regioncan be avoided. Therefore, a misrecognition in which a desired deviceicon is mixed among a large number of device icons in a small region anda display position of the desired device icon cannot be recognized canbe prevented.

Furthermore, in the first aspect described above, for example, when theone device icon is determined to be a television set icon representing atelevision set based on the first information, the television set iconmay be displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to theliving room.

In the first aspect described above, for example, when it is determinedthat a type of one device icon among the one or more device icons is atype to be displayed on the display screen for the first time and thatthe one device icon potentially corresponds to a plurality of roomsamong the one or more rooms based on the first information, the onedevice icon may be displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a largest room among the plurality of potentiallycorresponding rooms.

According to the first aspect described above, when it is determinedthat a type of one device icon among one or more device icons is a typeto be displayed on the display screen for the first time and that theone device icon potentially corresponds to a plurality of rooms amongthe one or more rooms based on the first information, the one deviceicon is displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to alargest room among the plurality of potentially corresponding rooms.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a television set anda device icon representing the television set potentially corresponds toa plurality of rooms such as a living room, a study, and a bedroom, thedevice icon is initially displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a largest room among the plurality of potentiallycorresponding rooms such as the living room.

Therefore, for example, since the device icon representing thetelevision set is displayed in a region corresponding to the living roomas a position of initial display without requiring the user to set acorrespondence relationship between the device icon and a roomcorresponding to the device icon by manual input, erroneous operationsof displaying the device icon in a region other than a regioncorresponding to a room that corresponds to the device icon by mistakecan be reduced. In addition, if a display position of the device iconmust be changed, for example, the device icon can be moved into a regioncorresponding to a room such as a bedroom that differs from the livingroom by a user's operation after the device icon is displayed. In thiscase, since a user's operation is only accepted when the displayposition must be changed, operations by the user can be made lesscomplicated.

Furthermore, since the device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a largest room such as the living roomamong the plurality of potentially corresponding rooms, the device iconis to be initially displayed at a most likely display position. In otherwords, the device icon is to be initially displayed at a position wherea change in display position is least likely. Therefore, since thedevice icon can be displayed without involving a setting made by theuser and the likelihood of the display position of the device icon beingchanged is low, erroneous operations by the user can be significantlyreduced.

Furthermore, since the device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a largest room such as the living roomamong the plurality of potentially corresponding rooms, a situationwhere a large number of device icons are displayed in a mixed manner ina small region can be avoided. Therefore, a misrecognition in which adevice icon to be initially displayed is mixed among a large number ofdevice icons in a small region and a display position of the device iconto be initially displayed cannot be recognized can be prevented.

In the first aspect described above, for example, when it is determinedthat a type of one device icon among the one or more device icons is atype to be newly displayed on the display screen and that the one deviceicon is a television set icon representing a television set based on thefirst information, the television set icon may be displayed in a regionon the display screen corresponding to the living room.

In the first aspect described above, for example, when one device iconamong the one or more device icons is determined to be a refrigeratoricon representing a refrigerator based on the first information, therefrigerator icon may be displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the kitchen.

Another mode of the first aspect is

-   -   a method for providing information in an information management        system which is connected to a network that controls one or more        target devices associated with a same building ID and which        manages information on the one or more target devices, the        method including:    -   receiving registration notification representing that one target        device among the one or more target devices has been newly        registered in the information management system, from the one        target device via the network;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing each of the one or        more target devices and the second information indicating an        attribute of each of one or more rooms included in a display        screen representing a floor plan of a building indicated by the        building ID, determine an attribute of a room corresponding to a        type of a device icon representing the one target device based        on the received registration notification information; and    -   transmitting, via the network, third information indicating the        type of the device icon representing the one target device and        fourth information indicating the determined attribute of the        room, to an information apparatus which is associated with the        same building ID and which displays the display screen        representing the floor plan on a display, the device icon        representing the one target device being displayed in a region        on the display screen corresponding to a room that corresponds        to the device icon at the information apparatus based on the        third information and the fourth information.

According to the other mode described above, using at least one memorythat associates first information with second information, the firstinformation indicating a type of each of one or more device iconsrepresenting each of the one or more target devices and the secondinformation indicating an attribute of each of one or more roomsincluded in a display screen representing a floor plan of a buildingindicated by a building ID, an attribute of a room corresponding to atype of a device icon representing one target device is determined basedon received registration notification information. Accordingly, thedevice icon representing the one target device is displayed in a regionon the display screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to thedevice icon on a display of an information apparatus.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a refrigerator, adevice icon representing the refrigerator is displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a kitchen. In addition, when thetarget device is a toilet seat apparatus with a washing function, adevice icon representing the toilet seat apparatus with a washingfunction is displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding toa toilet.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

In the other mode described above, for example, when selection of any ofthe one or more device icons is sensed by the information apparatus in aregion corresponding to any of the rooms included in the floor plan, acontrol screen may be displayed for at least any of operation and stateconfirmation of a target device corresponding to the selected deviceicon, on the display screen representing the floor plan at theinformation apparatus, and a control command may be output for at leastany of the operation and the state confirmation of the target devicecorresponding to the selected device icon, from the informationapparatus to the network based on an operation on the control screen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the at least one memorymay further store fifth information indicating position of each of theone or more rooms on the floor plan, the method further comprising:determining position information indicating a region corresponding to aroom that corresponds to the type of the device icon representing theone target device, using the fifth information, and transmitting thedetermined position information to the information apparatus via thenetwork, the device icon representing the one target device beingdisplayed in the region on the display screen corresponding to the roomthat corresponds to the device icon, at the information apparatus basedon the transmitted position information.

In the other mode described above, for example, when it is determinedthat the device icon representing the one target device corresponds to aplurality of rooms among the one or more rooms based on the firstinformation, a largest room among the plurality of the correspondingrooms may be determined as a room corresponding to the type of thedevice icon representing the one target device, and informationindicating an attribute of the determined room may be transmitted as thefourth information to the information apparatus via the network.

According to the other mode described above, when it is determined thata device icon representing one target device potentially corresponds toa plurality of rooms among one or more rooms, a largest room among theplurality of potentially corresponding rooms is determined as a roomcorresponding to a type of the device icon representing the one targetdevice.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a television set anda device icon representing the television set potentially corresponds toa plurality of rooms such as a living room, a study, and a bedroom, thedevice icon is displayed in a region on the display screen correspondingto a largest room among the plurality of potentially corresponding roomssuch as the living room.

Therefore, for example, since the device icon representing thetelevision set is displayed in a region corresponding to the living roomwithout requiring the user to set a correspondence relationship betweenthe device icon and a room corresponding to the device icon, erroneousoperations of displaying the device icon in a region other than a regioncorresponding to a room that corresponds to the device icon by mistakecan be reduced. In addition, if a display position of the device iconmust be changed, for example, the device icon can be moved into a regioncorresponding to a room such as a bedroom that differs from the livingroom by a user's operation after the device icon is displayed. In thiscase, since a user's operation is only accepted when the displayposition must be changed, operations by the user can be made lesscomplicated.

Furthermore, since the device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a largest room such as the living roomamong the plurality of potentially corresponding rooms, the device iconis to be displayed at a most likely display position. In other words,the device icon is to be displayed at a position where a change indisplay position is least likely. Therefore, since the device icon canbe displayed without involving a setting made by the user and thelikelihood of the display position of the device icon being changed islow erroneous operations by the user can be significantly reduced.

In addition, since the device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a largest room such as the living roomamong the plurality of potentially corresponding rooms, a situationwhere a large number of device icons are displayed in a mixed manner ina small region can be avoided. Therefore, a misrecognition in which adesired device icon is mixed among a large number of device icons in asmall region and a display position of the desired device icon cannot berecognized can be prevented.

In the other mode described above, for example, when the device iconrepresenting the one target device is determined to be a refrigeratoricon representing a refrigerator based on the first information, therefrigerator icon may be displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the kitchen, at the information apparatus.

In the other mode described above, for example, when the device iconrepresenting the one target device is determined to be a television seticon representing a television set based on the first information, thetelevision set icon may be displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the living room.

A second aspect of the present disclosure provides

-   -   a method for controlling information apparatus having a display        and being connected to a network, over which one or more target        devices are controlled.    -   the method causing a computer of the information apparatus to:    -   display on the display a display screen representing a floor        plan including one or more rooms;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing the one or more        target devices and the second information indicating an        attribute of each of the one or more rooms to display a device        icon having a room that corresponds to a type of a device icon        among the one or more device icons in a region on the display        screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to the device        icon and display a device icon not having a room that        corresponds to the type of the device icon among the one or more        device icons in a prescribed region on the display screen;    -   when selection of any of the one or more device icons is sensed        in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in the        floor plan, display a control screen for at least any of        operation and state confirmation of a target device        corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screen        representing the floor plan; and    -   output to the network a control command for at least any of the        operation and the state confirmation of the target device        corresponding to the selected device icon, based on an operation        on the control screen.

According to the second aspect described above, using at least onememory that associates first information with second information, thefirst information indicating a type of each of device icons representingeach of the one or more target devices and the second informationindicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms, a device iconhaving a room that corresponds to a type of a device icon among one ormore device icons is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to the device icon.

Accordingly, for example, when the type of the target device is arefrigerator and a room corresponding to the refrigerator is a kitchen,a device icon representing the refrigerator is displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to the kitchen. In addition, when thetype of the target device is a toilet seat apparatus with a washingfunction and a room corresponding to the toilet seat apparatus with awashing function is a toilet, a device icon representing the toilet seatapparatus with a washing function is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to the toilet.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

On the other hand, a device icon not having a room that corresponds to atype of the device icon among the one or more device icons is displayedin a prescribed region on the display screen.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a humidifier and aroom is not associated with the humidifier, a device icon representingthe humidifier is displayed in a region outside of a frame of a displayregion of a floor plan or in a prescribed region such as a regioncorresponding to a living room.

In this case, since a display position of the device icon is likely tobe changed, for example, the device icon is displayed in a regionoutside of a frame of a display region of a floor plan where the deviceicon can be easily recognized or in a region corresponding to a livingroom which offers a large display region and enables the device icon tobe recognized even when other device icons are displayed. Accordingly, adevice icon of a type of which display position is likely to be changedis displayed based on the assumption that the display position is to bechanged by the user. Therefore, by displaying a device icon of a type ofwhich display position is likely to be changed based on the assumptionthat the display position is to be changed by the user and bysuppressing involvement of a user's operation, erroneous operations inwhich the device icon is erroneously displayed in a region that differsfrom a region corresponding to a room that corresponds to the deviceicon can be reduced.

In the second aspect described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region outside of a display region of the floor plan among thedisplay screen.

In the second aspect described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region corresponding to a largest room among one or more roomsincluded in the floor plan.

In the second aspect described above, for example, when the one or moredevice icons include two or more device icons of the same type, onedevice icon among the two or more device icons of the same type may bedisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to a room thatcorresponds to the one device icon and the other device icon may bedisplayed in a prescribed region on the display screen.

In the second aspect described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region outside of a display region of the floor plan among thedisplay screen.

In the second aspect described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region corresponding to a largest room among one or more roomsincluded in the floor plan.

Another mode of the second aspect provides

-   -   a method for providing information in an information management        system which is connected to a network that controls one or more        target devices associated with a same building ID and which        manages information on the one or more target devices, the        method including:    -   receiving registration notification representing that one target        device among the one or more target devices has been newly        registered in the information management system, from the one        target device via the network;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing each of the one or        more target devices and the second information indicating an        attribute of each of one or more rooms included in a display        screen representing a floor plan of a building indicated by the        building ID, determine an attribute of a room corresponding to a        type of a device icon representing the one target device based        on the received registration notification information;    -   when there is a room corresponding to a type of the device icon        representing the one target device, transmitting, via the        network, third information indicating the type of the device        icon representing the one target device and fourth information        indicating the determined attribute of the room, to an        information apparatus which is managed in association with the        same building ID and which displays the display screen        representing the floor plan on a display, and when there is no        room corresponding to a type of the device icon representing the        one target device, transmitting the third information indicating        the type of the device icon representing the one target device        and fifth information indicating a prescribed region on the        display screen to the information apparatus via the network; and    -   displaying the device icon representing the one target device in        a region on the display screen corresponding to a room that        corresponds to the device icon on the display of the information        apparatus based on the third information and the fourth        information or displaying the device icon representing the one        target device in a region on the display screen corresponding to        the prescribed region on the display of the information        apparatus based on the third information and the fifth        information.

According to the other mode described above, when there is a roomcorresponding to a type of a device icon representing one target device,third information indicating the type of the device icon representingthe one target device and fourth information indicating a determinedattribute of a room are transmitted via the network to an informationapparatus which is associated with a same building ID and which displaysa display screen representing a floor plan on a display. In addition,when there is no room corresponding to the type of the device iconrepresenting the one target device, the third information indicating thetype of the device icon representing the one target device and fifthinformation indicating a prescribed region on the display screen aretransmitted via the network to the information apparatus. Accordingly,the device icon representing the one target device is displayed in aregion on the display screen corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon based on the third information and the fourthinformation on the display of the information apparatus. In addition,based on the third information and the fifth information, the deviceicon representing the one target device is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to the prescribed region on the display ofthe information apparatus.

Accordingly, for example, when the type of the target device is arefrigerator and a room corresponding to the refrigerator is a kitchen,a device icon representing the refrigerator is displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to the kitchen. In addition, when thetype of the target device is a toilet seat apparatus with a washingfunction and a room corresponding to the toilet seat apparatus with awashing function is a toilet, a device icon representing the toilet seatapparatus with a washing function is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to the toilet.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

On the other hand, where there is no room corresponding to a type of adevice icon representing one target device, the device icon representingthe one target device is displayed in a prescribed region on the displayscreen.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a humidifier and aroom is not associated with the humidifier, a device icon representingthe humidifier is displayed in a region outside of a frame of a displayregion of a floor plan or in a prescribed region such as a regioncorresponding to a living room.

In this case, since a display position of the device icon is likely tobe changed, for example, the device icon is displayed in a regionoutside of a frame of a display region of a floor plan where the deviceicon can be easily recognized or in a region corresponding to a livingroom which offers a large display region and enables the device icon tobe recognized even when other device icons are displayed. Accordingly, adevice icon of a type of which display position is likely to be changedis displayed based on the assumption that the display position is to bechanged by the user. Therefore, by displaying a device icon of a type ofwhich display position is likely to be changed based on the assumptionthat the display position is to be changed by the user and bysuppressing involvement of a user's operation, erroneous operations inwhich the device icon is erroneously displayed in a region that differsfrom a region corresponding to a room that corresponds to the deviceicon can be reduced.

In the other mode described above, for example, when selection of any ofthe one or more device icons is sensed by the information apparatus in aregion corresponding to any of the rooms included in the floor plan, acontrol screen may be displayed for at least any of operation and stateconfirmation of a target device corresponding to the selected deviceicon, on the display screen representing the floor plan at theinformation apparatus, and a control command may be output for at leastany of the operation and the state confirmation of the target devicecorresponding to the selected device icon to the network based on anoperation on the control screen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region outside of a display region of the floor plan among thedisplay screen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region corresponding to a largest room among one or more roomsincluded in the floor plan.

In the other mode described above, for example, when the one or moredevice icons include two or more device icons of the same type, onedevice icon among the two or more device icons of the same type may bedisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to a room thatcorresponds to the one device icon and the other device icon may bedisplayed in a prescribed region on the display screen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region outside of a display region of the floor plan among thedisplay screen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the prescribed regionmay be a region corresponding to a largest room among one or more roomsincluded in the floor plan.

A third aspect of the present disclosure provides

-   -   a method for controlling information apparatus having a display        and being connected to a network, over which one or more target        devices are controlled,    -   the method causing a computer of the information apparatus to:    -   display on the display a display screen representing a floor        plan including one or more rooms;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing the one or more        target devices, the second information indicating a performance        of a target device corresponding to the one or more device        icons, and third information indicating an attribute of each of        the one or more rooms, display each of the one or more device        icons in a region on the display screen corresponding to a room        that corresponds to each of the one or more device icons in        accordance with the type of each of the one or more device icons        and the performance of the target device corresponding to the        one or more device icons;    -   when selection of any of the one or more device icons is sensed        in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in the        floor plan, display a control screen for at least any of        operation and state confirmation of a target device        corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screen        representing the floor plan; and    -   output to the network a control command for at least any of the        operation and the state confirmation of the target device        corresponding to the selected device icon, based on an operation        on the control screen.

According to the present third aspect, using at least one memory thatassociates first information with second information, the firstinformation indicating a type of each of one or more device iconsrepresenting each of one or more target devices, the second informationindicating a performance of a target device corresponding to the one ormore device icons, and third information indicating an attribute of eachof the one or more rooms, the one or more device icons are displayed ina region on the display screen corresponding to a room that correspondsto each of the one or more device icons in accordance with the type ofeach of the one or more device icons and the performance of the targetdevice corresponding to the one or more device icons.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a television set, inaccordance with a size of a display screen of the television set, adevice icon representing the television set is displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a living room or a bedroom.

In addition, when the target device is an air conditioner, in accordancewith a maximum output of the air conditioner, a device icon representingan air conditioner is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to the maximum output.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

Furthermore, since a room in which a device icon is to be displayed isdetermined in consideration of a performance of a target devicecorresponding to one or more device icons, even when there are aplurality of rooms with an attribute including a possibility of a deviceicon being displayed therein, the device icon can be displayed in aregion on the display screen corresponding to a room in accordance witha performance of a target device corresponding to the device icon.

Therefore, even when there are a plurality of rooms with an attributeincluding a possibility of a device icon being displayed therein, anerroneous operation of displaying a device icon in a regioncorresponding to a room that does not match a performance of a targetdevice corresponding to the device icon by mistake can be preventedwithout having to require the user to set a correspondence relationshipbetween the device icon and a room corresponding to the device icon.

In the third aspect described above, for example, when the one or moredevice icons include two or more device icons of the same type, based onthe second information, each of the two or more device icons of the sametype may be displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding toa room with a size corresponding to a performance of a target devicecorresponding to each of the two or more device icons of the same typein accordance with the performance of the target device corresponding toeach of the two or more device icons of the same type.

In the third aspect described above, for example, when it is determinedthat two or more device icons of the same type are included in the oneor more device icons based on the first information, a room with a sizecorresponding to a performance of a target device corresponding to eachof the two or more device icons of the same type may be determined andeach of the two or more device icons of the same type may be displayedin a region on the display screen corresponding to each determined roombased on the second information and the third information.

In the third aspect described above, for example, the at least onememory may further store fourth information indicating a position ofeach of the one or more rooms on the floor plan, the regioncorresponding to each of the one or more rooms may be determined usingthe fourth information, and each of the one or more device icons may bedisplayed in the region on the display screen corresponding to the roomthat corresponds to each of the one or more device icons in accordancewith the type of each of the one or more device icons and a performanceof a target device corresponding to the one or more device icons.

In the third aspect described above, for example, when the one or moredevice icons include two or more device icons of the same type, a sum ofperformances of target devices corresponding to at least two deviceicons among the two or more device icons of the same type may bedetermined based on the second information, and each of the at least twodevice icons among the two or more device icons of the same type may bedisplayed in accordance with the determined sum of performances in aregion on the display screen corresponding to a room with a size thatcorresponds to the calculated sum of performances.

According to the third aspect described above, for example, when thereare two illumination devices as target devices, a device iconrepresenting each of the two illumination devices is displayed inaccordance with a sum of performances (for example, power consumption)of the two illumination devices in a region on the display screencorresponding to one room such as a living room that corresponds to thesum of performances.

Accordingly, for example, when two or more target devices of a same typeare to be installed in a living room that is a relatively spacious room,an erroneous operation where a part of two or more device icons isseparately displayed in a region corresponding to another room can beprevented.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

In the third aspect described above, for example, when it is determinedthat the one or more device icons include two or more device icons ofthe same type based on the first information, a sum of performances oftarget devices corresponding to at least two device icons among the twoor more device icons of the same type may be determined based on thesecond information, a room of a size corresponding to performances ofthe target devices corresponding to at least two device icons among thetwo or more device icons of the same type may be determined based on thedetermined sum of performances and the third information, and each ofthe at least two device icons among the two or more device icons of thesame type may be displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to the determined room.

In the third aspect described above, for example, the device icon mayinclude an illumination device icon that represents an illuminationdevice and a performance of the illumination device corresponding to theillumination device icon may include power consumption of theillumination device.

In the third aspect described above, for example, the device icon mayinclude a television set icon that represents a television set and aperformance of the television set corresponding to the television seticon may include a screen size of the television set.

In the third aspect described above, for example, the device icon mayinclude an air conditioner icon that represents an air conditioner and aperformance of the air conditioner corresponding to the air conditionericon may include a maximum output of the air conditioner.

In the third aspect described above, for example, each of the one ormore device icons displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or moredevice icons may include information indicating a performance of atarget device.

Another mode of the third aspect provides

-   -   a method for providing information in an information management        system which is connected to a network that controls one or more        target devices associated with a same building ID and which        manages information on the one or more target devices, the        method including:    -   receiving registration notification representing that one target        device among the one or more target devices has been newly        registered in the information management system, from the one        target device via the network;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing each of the one or        more target devices, the second information indicating a        performance of a target device corresponding to the one or more        device icons, and third information indicating an attribute of        each of one or more rooms included in a display screen        representing a floor plan of a building indicated by the same        building ID to determine an attribute of a room corresponding to        a type of a device icon representing the one target device and        to a performance of the one target device based on the received        registration notification information; and    -   transmitting fourth information indicating the type of the        device icon representing the one target device and fifth        information indicating the determined attribute of the room to        an information apparatus which is associated with the same        building ID and which displays a display screen representing the        floor plan on a display via the network, the device icon        representing the one target device being displayed in a region        on the display screen corresponding to a room that corresponds        to the device icon at the information apparatus based on the        fourth information and the fifth information.

According to the present other mode, using at least one memory thatassociates first information with second information, the firstinformation indicating a type of each of one or more device iconsrepresenting each of the one or more target devices, the secondinformation indicating a performance of a target device corresponding tothe one or more device icons, and third information indicating anattribute of each of the one or more rooms included in a display screenrepresenting a floor plan of a building indicated by a same building ID,an attribute of a room corresponding to a type of a device iconrepresenting one target device and to a performance of the one targetdevice is determined based on the received registration notificationinformation. Accordingly, the device icon representing the one targetdevice is displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to aroom that corresponds to the device icon on a display of an informationapparatus.

Accordingly, for example, when the target device is a television set, inaccordance with a size of a display screen of the television set, adevice icon representing the television set is displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a living room or a bedroom.

In addition, when the target device is an air conditioner, in accordancewith a maximum output of the air conditioner, a device icon representingthe air conditioner is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to the maximum output.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

In the other mode described above, for example, when selection of any ofthe one or more device icons is sensed by the information apparatus in aregion corresponding to any of the rooms included in the floor plan, acontrol screen for at least any of operation and state confirmation of atarget device corresponding to the selected device icon may be displayedon the display screen representing the floor plan, and a control commandfor at least any of the operation and the state confirmation of thetarget device corresponding to the selected device icon may be output tothe network based on an operation on the control screen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the at least one memorymay further store sixth information indicating position of each of theone or more rooms on the floor plan, the method further comprising:determining position information of a room that corresponds to a type ofa device icon representing the one target device and to a performance ofthe one target device, using the sixth information, and transmitting thedetermined position information to the information apparatus via thenetwork, the device icon representing the one target device beingdisplayed in the region on the display screen corresponding to the roomthat corresponds to the device icon at the information apparatus basedon the transmitted position information.

In the other mode described above, for example, registrationnotification information representing that two or more target devicesamong the one or more target devices has been newly registered in theinformation management system may be received from the two or moretarget devices via the network; when it is determined that types of twoor more device icons representing each of the two or more target devicesare the same based on the first information, an attribute of a roomcorresponding to each of the two or more device icons may be determinedin accordance with a performance of each of the two or more targetdevices based on the second information; the fourth informationindicating a type of each of the two or more device icons and the fifthinformation indicating an attribute of each room may be transmitted withrespect to each of the two or more device icons to the informationapparatus via the network; and the two or more device icons may bedisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to a room thatcorresponds to each of the two or more device icons based on the fourthinformation and fifth information on the display of the informationapparatus.

According to the present other mode, when it is determined that thetypes of two or more device icons are the same based on the firstinformation, an attribute of a room corresponding to each of the two ormore device icons is determined in accordance with a performance of eachof the two or more target devices based on the second information.Accordingly, the two or more device icons are displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each ofthe two or more device icons on a display of an information apparatus.

As a result, for example, when the types of two or more device icons areillumination devices, it is determined in accordance of a performance(for example, power consumption) of each of the two or more illuminationdevices that a room corresponding to a device icon representing oneillumination device among the two or more illumination devices is aliving room and a room corresponding to a device icon representinganother illumination device is a bedroom.

Therefore, even when types of two or more device icons are the same, anerroneous operation where each of the two or more device icons isdisplayed in a region corresponding to a room that does not correspondto a performance of each of two or more target devices can be preventedwithout involving a setting operation by the user.

In the other mode described above, for example, registrationnotification information representing that two or more target devicesamong the one or more target devices has been newly registered in theinformation management system may be received from the two or moretarget devices via the network; when it is determined that types of twoor more device icons representing each of the two or more target devicesare the same based on the first information, a sum of performances ofeach of the two or more target devices is determined and an attribute ofone room corresponding to the determined sum of performances may bedetermined based on the second information; the fourth informationindicating a type of each of the two or more device icons and the fifthinformation indicating an attribute of the one room may be transmittedto the information apparatus via the network; and the two or more deviceicons may be displayed in a region on the display screen correspondingto the one room based on the fourth information and fifth information onthe display of the information apparatus.

According to the present other mode, when it is determined that thetypes of two or more device icons representing each of the two or moretarget devices are the same based on the first information, an attributeof one room corresponding to a sum of performances of each of the two ormore target devices is determined based on the second information. Basedon the determined types of two or more device icons and the determinedattribute of the one room, the two or more device icons are displayed ina region on the display screen corresponding to the one room on thedisplay of the information apparatus.

Accordingly, for example, when there are two illumination devices astarget devices, a device icon representing each of the two illuminationdevices is displayed in accordance with a sum of performances (forexample, power consumption) of the two illumination devices in a regionon the display screen corresponding to one room such as a living roomthat corresponds to the sum of performances.

Therefore, for example, when two or more target devices of a same typeare to be installed in a living room that is a relatively spacious room,an erroneous operation where a part of two or more device icons isseparately displayed in a region corresponding to another room can beprevented.

As a result, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

In the other mode described above, for example, the device icon mayinclude an illumination device icon that represents an illuminationdevice and a performance of the illumination device corresponding to theillumination device icon may include power consumption of theillumination device.

In the other mode described above, for example, the device icon mayinclude a television set icon that represents a television set and aperformance of the television set corresponding to the television seticon may include a screen size of the television set.

In the other mode described above, for example, the device icon mayinclude an air conditioner icon that represents an air conditioner and aperformance of the air conditioner corresponding to the air conditionericon may include a maximum output of the air conditioner.

In the other mode described above, for example, each of the one or moredevice icons displayed in a region on the display screen correspondingto a room that corresponds to each of the one or more device icons mayinclude information indicating a performance of a target device.

A fourth aspect of the present disclosure provides

-   -   a method for controlling information apparatus having a display        and being connected to a network, over which one or more target        devices are controlled,    -   the method causing a computer of the information apparatus to:    -   display on the display a display screen representing a floor        plan including one or more rooms;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing the one or more        target devices and the second information indicating an        attribute of each of the one or more rooms, display each of the        one or more device icons in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or        more device icons in accordance with the type of each of the one        or more device icons;    -   when selection of any of the one or more device icons is sensed        in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in the        floor plan, display a control screen for at least any of        operation and state confirmation of a target device        corresponding to the selected device icon on the display screen        representing the floor plan; and    -   output to the network a control command for at least any of the        operation and the state confirmation of the target device        corresponding to the selected device icon, based on an operation        on the control screen, wherein    -   the one or more device icons include a device icon of a first        type and a device icon of a second type that is in a        relationship of being displayed in a region on the display        screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which the        device icon of the first type is displayed, and    -   when it is determined that one device icon among the one or more        device icons is the device icon of the second type, the one        device icon is displayed in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a same room as a room in which the device icon        of the first type is displayed.

According to the present fourth aspect, the one or more device iconsinclude a device icon of a first type and a device icon of a second typethat is in a relationship of being displayed in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to a same room as a room in which the device iconof the first type is displayed. In addition, when it is determined thatone device icon among the one or more device icons is the device icon ofthe second type, the one device icon is displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first type is displayed.

Accordingly, for example, when the device icon of the first type is adevice icon representing a television set and the device icon of thesecond type is a device icon representing a content reproducing machinesuch as a DVD player, the device icon representing the contentreproducing machine is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as a room in which the device iconrepresenting the television set is displayed.

As described above, a display position of the device icon of the secondtype (for example, a device icon representing a content reproducingmachine) is determined by focusing on the fact that the device icon ofthe second type is in a relationship of being displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first type (for example, a device icon representing atelevision set) is displayed.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

In the fourth aspect described above, for example, the at least onememory may further store third information indicating that the onedevice icon is the device icon of the second type and fourth informationindicating a type of the device icon of the first type that correspondsto the device icon of the second type, and when the one device icon isdetermined to be the device icon of the second type based on the thirdinformation, a room in which the device icon of the first type is beingdisplayed may be determined based on the fourth information and the onedevice icon may be displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as the determined room.

In the fourth aspect described above, for example, when one or two ormore device icons among the one or more device icons are determined tobe device icons of the second type, the one or two or more device iconsmay be displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to asame room as a room in which the device icon of the first type isdisplayed.

In the fourth aspect described above, for example, the device icon ofthe first type may include a device icon representing a refrigerator andthe device icon of the second type may include a device iconrepresenting a microwave oven.

In the fourth aspect described above, for example, the same room may bea kitchen.

In the fourth aspect described above, for example, the device icon ofthe first type may include a device icon representing a television setand the device icon of the second type may include a device iconrepresenting a content reproducing machine that reproduces contents.

In the fourth aspect described above, for example, the device icon ofthe first type may include a device icon representing a television setand the device icon of the second type may include a device iconrepresenting a content recording machine that records contents.

In the fourth aspect described above, for example, the same room may bea living room.

Another mode of the fourth aspect provides

-   -   a method for providing information in an information management        system which is connected to a network that controls one or more        target devices associated with a same building ID and which        manages information on the one or more target devices, the        method including:    -   receiving registration notification representing that one target        device among the one or more target devices has been newly        registered in the information management system, from the one        target device via the network;    -   using at least one memory that associates first information with        second information, the first information indicating a type of        each of one or more device icons representing each of the one or        more target devices, the second information indicating an        attribute of each of one or more rooms included in a display        screen representing a floor plan of a building indicated by the        building ID, and third information indicating a device icon of a        second type that is in a relationship of being displayed in a        region on the display screen corresponding to a same room as a        device icon of a first type among types of the one or more        device icons to determine whether or not the one device icon is        a device icon of the second type;    -   determining an attribute of a room corresponding to the device        icon of the first type when the one device icon is determined to        be a device icon of the second type;    -   transmitting fourth information indicating a type of the one        device icon and fifth information indicating the determined        attribute of the room to an information apparatus which is        associated with the same building ID and which displays a        display screen representing the floor plan on a display via the        network; and    -   displaying the one device icon in a region on the display screen        corresponding to a same room as a room in which the device icon        of the first type is displayed based on the fourth information        and the fifth information at the information apparatus.

According to the present other aspect, using at least one memory thatassociates first information with second information, the firstinformation indicating a type of each of one or more device iconsrepresenting each of the one or more target devices, the secondinformation indicating an attribute of each of one or more roomsincluded in a display screen representing a floor plan of a buildingindicated by a same building ID, and third information indicating adevice icon of a second type that is in a relationship of beingdisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to a same roomas a device icon of a first type among types of the one or more deviceicons, whether or not one device icon representing one target device isa device icon of the second type based on the received registrationnotification information. When the one device icon is determined to be adevice icon of the second type, an attribute of a room corresponding tothe device icon of the first type is determined. Based on the determinedattribute, one device icon is displayed in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to a same room as the room in which the device iconof the first type is displayed at the information apparatus.

Accordingly, for example, when the device icon of the first type is adevice icon representing a television set and the device icon of thesecond type is a device icon representing a content reproducing machinesuch as a DVD player, the device icon representing the contentreproducing machine is displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as a room in which the device iconrepresenting the television set is displayed.

As described above, a display position of the device icon of the secondtype (for example, a device icon representing a content reproducingmachine) is determined by focusing on the fact that the device icon ofthe second type is in a relationship of being displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first type (for example, a device icon representing atelevision set) is displayed.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation of displaying a device icon in aregion other than a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon by mistake can be reliably prevented.

In the other mode described above, for example, when selection of any ofthe one or more device icons is sensed by the information apparatus in aregion corresponding to any of the rooms included in the floor plan, acontrol screen for at least any of operation and state confirmation of atarget device corresponding to the selected device icon may be displayedon the display screen representing the floor plan, and a control commandfor at least any of the operation and the state confirmation of thetarget device corresponding to the selected device icon may be output tothe network based on an operation on the control screen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the at least one memorymay further store sixth information indicating that the one device iconis the device icon of the second type and seventh information indicatinga type of the device icon of the first type that corresponds to thedevice icon of the second type, and when the one device icon isdetermined to be the device icon of the second type based on the sixthinformation, the device icon of the first type that corresponds to thedevice icon of the second type may be determined based on the seventhinformation and a room corresponding to the device icon of the firsttype may be determined based on the second information.

In the other mode described above, for example, registrationnotification information representing that two or more target devicesamong the one or more target devices has been newly registered in theinformation management system may be received from the two or moretarget devices via the network; when it is determined that types of twoor more device icons representing each of the two or more target devicesare the same based on the first information, whether or not the two ormore device icons are device icons of the second type may be determinedbased on the third information; when the two or more device icons aredetermined to be device icons of the second type, an attribute of a roomcorresponding to the device icon of the first type may be determined;the fourth information indicating types of the two or more device iconsand the fifth information indicating the determined attribute of theroom may be transmitted to the information apparatus via the network;and the two or more device icons may be displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first type is displayed based on the fourthinformation and fifth information on the display of the informationapparatus.

According to the present other mode, when it is determined that types oftwo or more device icons representing each of two or more target devicesare the same and the two or more device icons are determined to bedevice icons of the second type, an attribute of a room corresponding tothe device icon of the first type is determined.

Accordingly, for example, when each of the two or more device icons is adevice icon representing a content reproducing machine such as a DVDplayer and the device icon of the second type is a device iconrepresenting a content reproducing machine, device icons representingtwo or more content reproducing machines are displayed in a region onthe display screen corresponding to a same room as a room in which thedevice icon of the first type (for example, a device icon representing atelevision set) is displayed.

As described above, even when each of the two or more device icons isthe device icon of the second type (for example, a device iconrepresenting a content reproducing machine), a display position of thedevice icon of the second type is determined by focusing on arelationship between the device icon of the first type (for example, adevice icon representing a television set) and the device icon of thesecond type.

Therefore, since the user is not required to set a correspondencerelationship between a device icon and a room corresponding to thedevice icon, an erroneous operation where a part of two or more deviceicons is mistakenly displayed in a region corresponding to a room otherthan a room corresponding to the two or more device icons can beprevented.

In the other mode described above, for example, the at least one memorymay further store eighth information representing a use frequency of atarget device corresponding to the device icon of the first type, whenthe one device icon is determined to be the device icon of the secondtype, the device icon of the first type corresponding to the device iconof the second type may be determined, when the device icon of the secondtype corresponds to a plurality of device icons of the first type, atarget device with a highest use frequency among a plurality of targetdevices corresponding to the plurality of device icons of the first typemay be determined, an attribute of a room corresponding to the deviceicon of the first type that represents the target device determined tohave the highest use frequency may be determined, and the fourthinformation indicating a type of the one device icon and the fifthinformation indicating an attribute of a room corresponding to thedevice icon of the first type that represents the target devicedetermined to have the highest use frequency may be transmitted to theinformation apparatus via the network.

According to the present other mode, when the device icon of the secondtype corresponds to a plurality of device icons of the first type, atarget device with a highest use frequency among a plurality of targetdevices corresponding to the plurality of device icons of the first typeis determined. Based on the determination, the device icon of the secondtype is displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to aroom that corresponds to the device icon of the first type thatrepresents the target device determined to have the highest usefrequency.

Accordingly, for example, when the device icon of the second type is adevice icon representing a content reproducing machine, the device iconof the first type is a device icon representing a television set, andthe device icon representing the content reproducing machine correspondsto a plurality of device icons representing a television set, atelevision set with a highest use frequency among a plurality oftelevision sets is determined, and the device icon of the second type(for example, a device icon representing a content reproducing machine)is displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to a roomsuch as a living room that corresponds to a device icon representing thetelevision set with the highest use frequency.

Therefore, even when the device icon of the second type representing acontent reproducing machine corresponds to a plurality of device iconsof the first type representing a plurality of television sets, thedevice icon of the second type can be displayed in a room where thedevice icon is likely to be displayed by utilizing a relationshipbetween the device icon of the first type (for example, a device iconrepresenting a television set) and the device icon of the second type(for example, a device icon representing a content reproducing machine)without requiring the user to set a correspondence relationship betweena device icon and a room corresponding to the device icon.

As a result, erroneous operations where the device icon of the secondtype is mistakenly displayed on a room that differs from an appropriateroom can be reduced.

In the other mode described above, for example, the device icon of thefirst type may include a device icon representing a refrigerator and thedevice icon of the second type may include a device icon representing amicrowave oven.

In the other mode described above, for example, the same room may be akitchen.

In the other mode described above, for example, the device icon of thefirst type may include a device icon representing a television set andthe device icon of the second type may include a device iconrepresenting a content reproducing machine that reproduces contents.

In the other mode described above, for example, the device icon of thefirst type may include a device icon representing a television set andthe device icon of the second type may include a device iconrepresenting a content recording machine that records contents.

In the other mode described above, for example, the device icon of thefirst type may include a device icon representing a television set, thedevice icon of the second type may include a device icon representing acontent recording machine that records contents, and the same room maybe a living room.

In the other mode described above, for example, the eighth informationmay include information indicating turning on or off power of a targetdevice corresponding to the device icon of the first type.

In the other mode described above, for example, a target devicecorresponding to the device icon of the first type may be a televisionset and the eighth information may include information indicating aviewing history of the television set.

A fifth aspect of the present disclosure provides

-   -   a method for providing information in a network system that is        connected to an information apparatus which remotely controls        one or more target devices connected inside a building and which        has a display, the method including:    -   receiving first information capable of identifying a type of a        floor plan of the building displayed on the display of the        information apparatus from the information apparatus via a        network;    -   determining a floor plan of a same type as the type of the floor        plan indicated by the first information using a first database        that manages second information indicating a type of each floor        plan;    -   using a second database that manages, for each type of floor        plan, third information indicating a frequency at which each of        the one or more device icons is displayed in each of one or more        rooms included in the floor plan to decide the one or more        device icons displayed on the floor plan determined to be of the        same type and a room in which each of the one or more device        icons is displayed;    -   transmitting fourth information indicating the decided one or        more device icons and fifth information indicating the decided        room in which each of the one or more device icons is displayed        to the information apparatus via the network; and    -   displaying the one or more device icons in a region        corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or        more device icons on the display screen representing the floor        plan on the display of the information apparatus based on the        fourth information and the fifth information.

According to the present fifth aspect, a floor plan of a same type as atype of the floor plan indicated by the first information received fromthe information apparatus is determined using a first database thatmanages second information indicating a type of each floor plan. Using asecond database that manages, for each type of floor plan, thirdinformation that associates, with one another, one or more device iconsrepresenting one or more target devices, one or more rooms included in afloor plan in which each of the one or more device icons is to bedisplayed, and a frequency at which each of the one or more device iconsis displayed in each of the one or more rooms, one or more device iconsdisplayed on a floor plan determined to be of the same type and a roomin which each of the one or more device icons is displayed are decided.Based on the decided one or more device icons and the decided room, theone or more device icons is displayed in a region corresponding to aroom which is shown on a display screen representing a floor plan andwhich corresponds to each of the one or more device icons.

Accordingly, on a floor plan of a same type as a floor plan displayed onthe display of the information apparatus, a frequency at which each ofthe one or more device icons is displayed in each of the one or morerooms is referenced.

For example, in rooms with a same layout type in an apartment, choicesof arrangement positions of target devices such as a television set, awashing machine, and a refrigerator are limited by restrictions thatapply to the layout. Therefore, arrangement positions of target devicestend to become similar.

Accordingly, for example, display positions of device icons representingrespective target devices such as a television set, a washing machine,and a refrigerator are decided by referring to display positions ofdevice icons on floor plans of the same time without requiring the userto set a correspondence relationship between device icons and roomscorresponding to the device icons.

Therefore, since a room in which a device icon is highly frequentlydisplayed is displayed as an initial display position of the displayicon while minimizing settings performed by the user, erroneousoperations where the device icon is mistakenly displayed in a regionthat differs from a region corresponding to a room that corresponds tothe device icon can be reduced.

In addition, if a display position of the device icon must be changed,for example, the device icon can be moved into a room such as a bedroomthat differs from the living room by a user's operation. In this case,since a user's operation is only required when the display position mustbe changed, operations by the user can be made significantly lesscomplicated.

In the fifth aspect described above, for example, using a third databasethat manages sixth information indicating, for each type of floor plan,in which room each device icon is displayed, a frequency at which eachof the one or more device icons is displayed in each of the one or morerooms may be calculated for each type of floor plan.

In the fifth aspect described above, for example, the first informationand seventh information indicating a type of a new device icon to benewly displayed on a floor plan indicated by the first information maybe received from the information apparatus via the network, rooms inwhich a device icon of the type indicated by the seventh information isalready displayed may be excluded from room candidates in which a deviceicon of the type indicated by the seventh information is displayed on afloor plan of a type indicated by the first information using the seconddatabase, when a plurality of room candidates remain, a room with ahighest frequency at which a device icon of a type indicated by theseventh information is displayed may be decided from the plurality ofroom candidates, information indicating the decided room may betransmitted as the fifth information to the information apparatus viathe network, and the new device icon may be displayed in a region on thedisplay screen corresponding to the decided room based on the fifthinformation and the seventh information on the display of theinformation apparatus.

In the fifth aspect described above, for example, the first informationand seventh information indicating a type of a new device icon to benewly displayed on a floor plan indicated by the first information maybe received from the information apparatus via the network, rooms inwhich a device icon of the type indicated by the seventh information isalready displayed may be excluded from room candidates in which a deviceicon of the type indicated by the seventh information is displayed on afloor plan of a type indicated by the first information using the seconddatabase, when one room candidate remains, the one room candidate isdecided as a room in which a device icon of a type indicated by theseventh information is to be displayed, information indicating thedecided room may be transmitted as the fifth information to theinformation apparatus via the network, and the new device icon may bedisplayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to the decidedroom based on the fifth information and the seventh information on thedisplay of the information apparatus.

In the fifth aspect described above, for example, the first informationand seventh information indicating a type of a new device icon to benewly displayed on a floor plan indicated by the first information maybe received from the information apparatus via the network, rooms inwhich a device icon of the type indicated by the seventh information isalready displayed may be excluded from room candidates in which a deviceicon of the type indicated by the seventh information is displayed on afloor plan of a type indicated by the first information using the seconddatabase, when no room candidate remains, the outside of a region of afloor plan of a type indicated by the first information is decided as aregion in which a device icon of a type indicated by the seventhinformation is to be displayed, information indicating the decidedregion may be transmitted as the fifth information to the informationapparatus via the network, and the new device icon may be displayedoutside the region of the floor plan based on the fifth information andthe seventh information on the display of the information apparatus.

In the fifth aspect described above, for example, the second databasemay further manage an average arrangement position of device icons ineach room, fifth information indicating the decided room and eighthinformation indicating an average arrangement position of device iconsin the decided room may be transmitted to the information apparatus viathe network, and the new device icon may be displayed at the averagearrangement position in a region on the display screen corresponding tothe decided room based on the fifth information, the seventhinformation, and the eighth information on the display of theinformation apparatus.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY

The control method according to the present disclosure is useful as acontrol method for preferably controlling one or more target devicesconnected to a network.

1. A method for controlling an information apparatus having a displayand being connected to a network, over which one or more target devicesare controlled, the method causing a computer of the informationapparatus to: display on the display a display screen representing afloor plan including one or more rooms; using at least one memory thatassociates first information with second information, the firstinformation indicating a type of each of one or more device iconsrepresenting the one or more target devices and the second informationindicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms, display eachof the one or more device icons in a region on the display screencorresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one or moredevice icons in accordance with the type of each of the one or moredevice icons; when selection of any of the one or more device icons issensed in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in thefloor plan, display a control screen for at least any of operation andstate confirmation of a target device corresponding to the selecteddevice icon on the display screen representing the floor plan; andoutput to the network a control command for at least any of theoperation and the state confirmation of the target device correspondingto the selected device icon, based on an operation on the controlscreen, wherein the one or more device icons include a device icon of afirst type and a device icon of a second type that is in a relationshipof being displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to asame room as a room in which the device icon of the first type isdisplayed, and when it is determined that one device icon among the oneor more device icons is the device icon of the second type, the onedevice icon is displayed in a region on the display screen correspondingto a same room as a room in which the device icon of the first type isdisplayed.
 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein the at least onememory further store third information indicating that the one deviceicon is the device icon of the second type and fourth informationindicating a type of the device icon of the first type that correspondsto the device icon of the second type, and when the one device icon isdetermined to be the device icon of the second type based on the thirdinformation, a room in which the device icon of the first type is beingdisplayed is determined based on the fourth information and the onedevice icon is displayed in a region on the display screen correspondingto a same room as the determined room.
 3. The method according to claim1, wherein when one or two or more device icons among the one or moredevice icons are determined to be device icons of the second type, theone or two or more device icons are displayed in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to a same room as a room in which the device iconof the first type is displayed.
 4. The method according to claim 1,wherein the device icon of the first type includes a device iconrepresenting a refrigerator, and the device icon of the second typeincludes a device icon representing a microwave oven.
 5. The methodaccording to claim 4, wherein the same room is a kitchen.
 6. The methodaccording to claim 1, wherein the device icon of the first type includesa device icon representing a television set, and the device icon of thesecond type includes a device icon representing a content reproducingmachine that reproduces contents.
 7. The method according to claim 1,wherein the device icon of the first type includes a device iconrepresenting a television set, and the device icon of the second typeincludes a device icon representing a content recording machine thatrecords contents.
 8. The method according to claim 6, wherein the sameroom is a living room.
 9. A method for providing information in aninformation management system which is connected to a network thatcontrols one or more target devices associated with a same building IDand which manages information on the one or more target devices, themethod comprising: receiving registration notification representing thatone target device among the one or more target devices has been newlyregistered in the information management system, from the one targetdevice via the network; using at least one memory that associates firstinformation with second information, the first information indicating atype of each of one or more device icons representing each of the one ormore target devices, the second information indicating an attribute ofeach of one or more rooms included in a display screen representing afloor plan of a building indicated by the building ID, and thirdinformation indicating a device icon of a second type that is in arelationship of being displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as a device icon of a first type amongtypes of the one or more device icons to determine whether or not theone device icon is a device icon of the second type; determining anattribute of a room corresponding to the device icon of the first typewhen the one device icon is determined to be a device icon of the secondtype; transmitting fourth information indicating a type of the onedevice icon and fifth information indicating the determined attribute ofthe room to an information apparatus which is associated with the samebuilding ID and which displays a display screen representing the floorplan on a display via the network; and displaying the one device icon ina region on the display screen corresponding to a same room as a room inwhich the device icon of the first type is displayed based on the fourthinformation and the fifth information at the information apparatus. 10.The method according to claim 9, wherein when selection of any of theone or more device icons is sensed by the information apparatus in aregion corresponding to any of the rooms included in the floor plan, acontrol screen is displayed for at least any of operation and stateconfirmation of a target device corresponding to the selected deviceicon, on the display screen representing the floor plan, and a controlcommand for at least any of the operation and the state confirmation ofthe target device corresponding to the selected device icon is output tothe network based on an operation on the control screen.
 11. The methodaccording to claim 9, wherein the at least one memory further storessixth information indicating that the one device icon is the device iconof the second type and seventh information indicating a type of thedevice icon of the first type that corresponds to the device icon of thesecond type, and when the one device icon is determined to be the deviceicon of the second type based on the sixth information, the device iconof the first type that corresponds to the device icon of the second typeis determined based on the seventh information and a room correspondingto the device icon of the first type is determined based on the secondinformation.
 12. The method according to claim 9, wherein registrationnotification information representing that two or more target devicesamong the one or more target devices has been newly registered in theinformation management system is received from the two or more targetdevices via the network; when it is determined that types of two or moredevice icons representing each of the two or more target devices are thesame based on the first information, whether or not the two or moredevice icons are device icons of the second type is determined based onthe third information; when the two or more device icons are determinedto be device icons of the second type, an attribute of a roomcorresponding to the device icon of the first type is determined; thefourth information indicating types of the two or more device icons andthe fifth information indicating the determined attribute of the roomare transmitted to the information apparatus via the network; and thetwo or more device icons are displayed in a region on the display screencorresponding to a same room as a room in which the device icon of thefirst type is displayed based on the fourth information and fifthinformation on the display of the information apparatus.
 13. The methodaccording to claim 9, wherein the at least one memory further storeseighth information representing a use frequency of a target devicecorresponding to the device icon of the first type, when the one deviceicon is determined to be the device icon of the second type, the deviceicon of the first type corresponding to the device icon of the secondtype is determined, when the device icon of the second type correspondsto a plurality of device icons of the first type, a target device with ahighest use frequency among a plurality of target devices correspondingto the plurality of device icons of the first type is determined, anattribute of a room corresponding to the device icon of the first typethat represents the target device determined to have the highest usefrequency may be determined, and the fourth information indicating atype of the one device icon and the fifth information indicating anattribute of a room corresponding to the device icon of the first typethat represents the target device determined to have the highest usefrequency are transmitted to the information apparatus via the network.14. The method according to claim 9, wherein the device icon of thefirst type includes a device icon representing a refrigerator, and thedevice icon of the second type includes a device icon representing amicrowave oven.
 15. The method according to claim 14, wherein the sameroom is a kitchen.
 16. The method according to claim 9, wherein thedevice icon of the first type includes a device icon representing atelevision set, and the device icon of the second type includes a deviceicon representing a content reproducing machine that reproducescontents.
 17. The method according to claim 9, wherein the device iconof the first type includes a device icon representing a television set,and the device icon of the second type includes a device iconrepresenting a content recording machine that records contents.
 18. Themethod according to claim 9, wherein the device icon of the first typeincludes a device icon representing a television set, the device icon ofthe second type includes a device icon representing a content recordingmachine that records contents, and the same room is a living room. 19.The method according to claim 13, wherein the eighth informationincludes information indicating turning on or off power of a targetdevice corresponding to the device icon of the first type.
 20. Themethod according to claim 13, wherein a target device corresponding tothe device icon of the first type is a television set, and the eighthinformation includes information indicating a viewing history of thetelevision set.
 21. A non-transitory computer-readable recording mediumwhich stores a program to be executed by an information apparatus havinga display and being connected to a network, over which one or moretarget devices are controlled, the program causing a computer of theinformation apparatus to: display on the display a display screenrepresenting a floor plan including one or more rooms; using at leastone memory that associates first information with second information,the first information indicating a type of each of one or more deviceicons representing the one or more target devices and the secondinformation indicating an attribute of each of the one or more rooms,display each of the one or more device icons in a region on the displayscreen corresponding to a room that corresponds to each of the one ormore device icons in accordance with the type of each of the one or moredevice icons; when selection of any of the one or more device icons issensed in a region corresponding to any of the rooms included in thefloor plan, display a control screen for at least any of operation andstate confirmation of a target device corresponding to the selecteddevice icon on the display screen representing the floor plan; andoutput to the network a control command for at least any of theoperation and the state confirmation of the target device correspondingto the selected device icon, based on an operation on the controlscreen, wherein the one or more device icons include a device icon of afirst type and a device icon of a second type that is in a relationshipof being displayed in a region on the display screen corresponding to asame room as a room in which the device icon of the first type isdisplayed, and when it is determined that one device icon among the oneor more device icons is the device icon of the second type, the onedevice icon is displayed in a region on the display screen correspondingto a same room as a room in which the device icon of the first type isdisplayed.
 22. An information apparatus including the program accordingto claim 21.